S Af1022 PDF

Model R-C2a/b
(Machine Code: B022/B027)

SERVICE MANUAL
August 10th, 2001

Subject to change
!IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
4. If a job has started before the copier completes the warm-up or initializing
period, keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components
because the starts making copies as soon as the warm-up period is
completed.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

Toner is non-toxic, but if you get it in your eyes by accident, it may cause
temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as
first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate the toner cassettes. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when
exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of toner cassettes in accordance with local regulations. (This is a
non-toxic unit.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. The NVRAM on the Controller board has a lithium battery which can explode
if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. Do
not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in
accordance with local regulations.
3. The danger of explosion exists if batteries on the FCU, MBU and JBIG are
incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
!WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
!WARNING FOR LASER UNIT

WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can
seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
LASER-4.WMF
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ......................................... 1-1

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................1-1
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ...................................................................1-5
1.2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ................................................................1-5
1.2.2 INSTALLABLE OPTION TABLE .......................................................1-7
Copier options.......................................................................................1-7
Fax option .............................................................................................1-7
Printer/scanner options .........................................................................1-7
1.3 PAPER PATH............................................................................................1-8
1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................1-9
1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ......................................1-11
1.6 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................1-14
1.7 COPY PROCESS....................................................................................1-15
1.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................1-15
1.8 BOARD STRUCTURE.............................................................................1-17
1.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................1-17
1.8.2 CONTROLLER ...............................................................................1-19
2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 2-1

2.1 SCANNING................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 SCANNER DRIVE ............................................................................2-2
2.1.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE...........................2-3
2.2 IMAGE PROCESSING ..............................................................................2-5
2.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................2-5
2.2.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT).........................................................2-6
2.2.3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY...................................................................2-7
2.2.4 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)...................................................2-8
Overview...............................................................................................2-8
Image Processing Modes .....................................................................2-9
Image Processing Path.......................................................................2-10
Overview.............................................................................................2-10
SP Modes for Each Image Processing Step .......................................2-11
Text Mode...........................................................................................2-11
Photo Mode ........................................................................................2-12
Text/Photo Mode ................................................................................2-13
Pale Mode...........................................................................................2-14
Generation Copy.................................................................................2-15
Auto Shading ......................................................................................2-16
Pre-Filtering ........................................................................................2-16
Main Scan Magnification/Reduction....................................................2-16
Mirroring for ADF Mode ......................................................................2-16
Characteristic Detection......................................................................2-17
Filtering ...............................................................................................2-17
Overview.............................................................................................2-17
i
MTF Filter ...........................................................................................2-17
Smoothing Filter..................................................................................2-17
Characteristic Filter .............................................................................2-17
Independent Dot Erase .......................................................................2-18
Background Erase ..............................................................................2-18
ID Gamma (γ) Correction ....................................................................2-18
Gradation Processing .........................................................................2-18
Overview.............................................................................................2-18
Grayscale Processing .........................................................................2-19
Binary Picture Processing...................................................................2-19
Error Diffusion.....................................................................................2-19
Dithering .............................................................................................2-19
Line width correction ...........................................................................2-19
2.2.5 VIDEO CONTROL UNIT (VCU)......................................................2-20
Fine Character and Image (FCI) .........................................................2-20
2.3 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................2-21
2.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2-21
2.3.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC) ..................................................2-22
2.3.3 LD SAFETY SWITCH .....................................................................2-23
2.4 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................2-24
2.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2-24
2.4.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................2-25
2.4.3 NEW PCU DETECTION .................................................................2-26
2.5 DRUM CHARGE .....................................................................................2-27
2.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2-27
2.5.1 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION ..............................2-28
Correction for Environmental Conditions ............................................2-28
2.5.2 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING............................2-29
2.5.3 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING ..........................................2-30
2.6 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................2-31
2.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2-31
2.6.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................2-32
2.6.3 DEVELOPER MIXING ....................................................................2-33
2.6.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................2-34
2.6.5 TONER SUPPLY ............................................................................2-35
Toner bottle replenishment mechanism ..............................................2-35
Toner supply mechanism....................................................................2-36
2.6.6 TONER DENSITY CONTROL ........................................................2-37
Overview.............................................................................................2-37
Toner density sensor initial setting......................................................2-39
Toner density measurement ...............................................................2-39
Vsp/Vsg detection ...............................................................................2-39
Toner supply reference voltage (Vref) determination ..........................2-39
Toner supply determination ................................................................2-39
Toner Supply Motor On Time Determinations.....................................2-40
2.6.7 TONER SUPPLY IN ABNORMAL SENSOR CONDITIONS...........2-41
ID sensor ............................................................................................2-41
TD Sensor...........................................................................................2-41
2.6.8 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION AND RECOVERY............2-41
ii
Toner Near End Detection ..................................................................2-41
Toner Near End Recovery ..................................................................2-42
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................2-42
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................2-42
2.7 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING.......................................2-43
2.7.1 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................2-43
2.7.2 TONER RECYCLING .....................................................................2-44
2.8 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................2-45
2.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2-45
2.8.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM ..............................................2-46
2.8.3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM .........................2-47
2.8.4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM ............................................................2-48
2.8.5 PAPER END DETECTION .............................................................2-49
2.8.6 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION .......................................................2-50
2.8.7 FEED PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT FOR PAPER SIZE..................2-51
Overview.............................................................................................2-51
Paper Size Thresholds........................................................................2-51
Feed Pressure Adjustment .................................................................2-52
Effect of the Amount of Remaining Paper...........................................2-52
From tray full to paper near-end .........................................................2-52
From paper near end to paper end .....................................................2-53
2.8.8 PAPER SIZE DETECTION.............................................................2-54
2.8.9 SPECIAL PAPER SETTING...........................................................2-55
2.8.10 SIDE AND END FENCES.............................................................2-56
Side Fences........................................................................................2-56
End Fence ..........................................................................................2-56
2.8.11 PAPER REGISTRATION..............................................................2-57
2.9 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION ...................................2-58
2.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2-58
2.9.2 IMAGE TRANSFER CURRENT TIMING........................................2-59
2.9.3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING..................................................2-60
2.9.4 PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM.............................................2-60
2.10 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT......................................................2-61
2.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................2-61
2.10.2 FUSING DRIVE AND RELEASE MECHANISM ...........................2-62
2.10.3 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM .....................2-63
2.10.4 PRESSURE ROLLER...................................................................2-64
2.10.5 CLEANING MECHANISM ............................................................2-64
2.10.6 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..........................................2-65
Temperature Control...........................................................................2-65
Fusing Lamp Control...........................................................................2-66
2.10.7 OVERHEAT PROTECTION .........................................................2-67
2.10.8 PAPER EXIT ................................................................................2-67
2.11 ENERGY SAVER MODES ....................................................................2-68
2.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................2-68
2.11.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE..............................................................2-69
Entering the energy saver mode.........................................................2-69
What happens in energy saver mode .................................................2-69
Return to stand-by mode ....................................................................2-69
iii
2.11.3 AUTO OFF MODE........................................................................2-70
Entering off stand-by and off modes ...................................................2-70
Off Stand-by mode..............................................................................2-70
Off Mode .............................................................................................2-70
Returning to stand-by mode................................................................2-70
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 3-1

3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................3-1
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................3-1
3.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................3-1
3.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................3-2
3.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................3-3
3.2 COPIER INSTALLATION ..........................................................................3-4
3.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS .......................................3-4
3.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .......................................................3-5
3.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................3-6
3.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................3-7
3.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION ......................................................3-11
3.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................3-11
3.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................3-11
3.4 LCT INSTALLATION ...............................................................................3-14
3.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................3-14
3.5 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER INSTALLATION.....................3-17
3.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................3-17
3.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT INSTALLATION...................................................3-20
3.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK...................................................................3-20
3.7 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION .........................................................3-23
3.7.1 COMPONENT CHECK...................................................................3-23
3.8 SHIFT TRAY............................................................................................3-26
3.8.1 COMPONENT CHECK...................................................................3-26
3.9 BY-PASS FEED UNIT INSTALLATION...................................................3-28
3.9.1 COMPONENTS CHECK ................................................................3-28
3.10 DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLATION ............................................................3-30
3.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................3-30
3.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................3-31
3.11 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION .............................................................3-33
3.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................3-33
3.12 1,000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION ............................................3-35
3.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................3-35
3.13 500-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION ...............................................3-39
3.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................3-39
iv
3.14 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION ........................................................3-42
3.14.1 MEMORY (G578/G579)................................................................3-43
3.14.2 HDD (B420) ..................................................................................3-44
3.15 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION ..........................................................3-46
3.16 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER.........................................................3-48
3.17 TRAY HEATER .....................................................................................3-49
3.18 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) ...............................3-51
3.19 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT) ........................................................3-54
4 SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 4-1

4.1 GENERAL CAUTION ................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT) .................................................4-1
4.1.2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT..............................................................4-1
4.1.3 SCANNER UNIT...............................................................................4-1
4.1.4 LASER UNIT ....................................................................................4-2
4.1.5 FUSING UNIT...................................................................................4-2
4.1.6 PAPER FEED...................................................................................4-2
4.1.7 OTHERS...........................................................................................4-2
4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................4-3
4.2.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................4-3
Entering and Exiting SP mode ..............................................................4-3
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................4-4
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ...........4-5
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................4-5
4.2.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............................................4-6
SP1-XXX: Feed ....................................................................................4-6
SP2-XXX: Drum ..................................................................................4-16
SP4-XXX: Scanner .............................................................................4-25
SP5-XXX: Mode..................................................................................4-31
SP6-XXX: Peripherals.........................................................................4-41
SP7-XXX: Data Log ............................................................................4-43
SP9-XXX: Debug/Testing ...................................................................4-52
4.2.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP2-902-3) ......................................4-53
4.2.4 INPUT CHECK ...............................................................................4-54
Main Machine Input Check (SP5-803) ................................................4-54
ARDF Input Check (SP6-007).............................................................4-57
Finisher Input Check (SP6-117)..........................................................4-58
4.2.5 OUTPUT CHECK ...........................................................................4-60
Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804) .............................................4-60
ARDF Output Check (SP6-008)..........................................................4-62
Finisher Output Check (SP6-118).......................................................4-62
4.2.6 SMC DATA LISTS (SP5-990).........................................................4-63
4.2.7 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5-801) ..................................................4-64
Using a Flash Memory Card ...............................................................4-64
Without Using a Flash Memory Card ..................................................4-65
4.2.8 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA..............................4-66
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824)....................................................4-66
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825) ...............................................4-67
v
4.2.9 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301) ...............................................4-68
4.2.10 DF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP6-901)........................4-69
4.2.11 NIP BAND WIDTH MEASUREMENT (SP1-109) ..........................4-70
4.3 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD........................................................................4-71
4.4 SOFTWARE RESET ...............................................................................4-72
4.5 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET..............................4-72
4.5.1 SYSTEM SETTING RESET ...........................................................4-72
4.5.2 COPIER SETTING RESET ............................................................4-73
4.6 USER TOOLS .........................................................................................4-74
4.6.1 HOW TO USE UP MODE...............................................................4-74
UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display..........................4-74
System Settings ..................................................................................4-74
Copier/Document Server Features .....................................................4-75
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings ...................................................4-75
Inquiry .................................................................................................4-75
Counter ...............................................................................................4-76
4.7 LEDS .......................................................................................................4-77
Controller ............................................................................................4-77
SBCU..................................................................................................4-77
IPU......................................................................................................4-77
4.8 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................4-77
Controller: DIP SW2 ...........................................................................4-77
SBCU: DIP SW102 .............................................................................4-77
4.9 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ....................................................4-78
4.9.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ...........................................................................4-78
4.9.2 LUBRICANTS .................................................................................4-78
5 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................... 5-1

5.1 PM TABLE.................................................................................................5-1
6 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 6-1

6.1 SCANNER UNIT........................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.........................................................................6-1
6.1.2 SCANNER EXTERIOR/OPERATION PANEL ..................................6-2
6.1.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY...............................................................6-3
6.1.4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS .............................................................6-4
6.1.5 EXPOSURE LAMP ...........................................................................6-5
6.1.6 SCANNER MOTOR/LAMP STABILIZER..........................................6-6
6.1.7 SCANNER WIRES ...........................................................................6-7
6.2 LASER UNIT ...........................................................................................6-10
6.2.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .....................................................6-10
6.2.2 LASER UNIT ..................................................................................6-11
6.2.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................6-12
6.2.4 LD UNIT..........................................................................................6-12
6.2.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR....................................6-13
6.3 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................6-14
6.3.1 PCU ................................................................................................6-14
6.4 TRANSFER UNIT....................................................................................6-15
6.4.1 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT............................................................6-15
vi
6.4.2 IMAGE DENSITY SENSOR ...........................................................6-16
6.5 FUSING/EXIT ..........................................................................................6-17
6.5.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................6-17
6.5.2 THERMISTORS .............................................................................6-17
6.5.3 THERMOFUSE ..............................................................................6-18
6.5.4 HOT ROLLER AND FUSING LAMP ...............................................6-20
6.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER/CLEANING ROLLER ..................................6-21
6.5.6 PAPER EXIT SENSOR/PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR................6-22
6.6 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................6-23
6.6.1 FEED ROLLERS ............................................................................6-23
6.6.2 PAPER END SENSOR...................................................................6-24
6.6.3 PAPER TRAY LIFT MOTORS........................................................6-25
6.6.4 REGISTRATION CLUTCH .............................................................6-26
6.6.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES.............................................................6-27
Lower Paper Feed Clutch ...................................................................6-27
Upper Paper Feed Clutch. ..................................................................6-27
6.6.6 RELAY CLUTCHES........................................................................6-28
6.6.7 PAPER SIZE DETECTOR..............................................................6-29
6.6.8 REGISTRATION SENSOR.............................................................6-30
6.6.9 RELAY SENSORS .........................................................................6-31
Upper Relay Sensor............................................................................6-31
Lower Relay Sensor............................................................................6-31
6.7 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS.....................................................................6-32
6.7.1 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................6-32
6.7.2 SBCU BOARD................................................................................6-33
6.7.3 POWER PACK ...............................................................................6-33
6.7.4 MAIN MOTOR ................................................................................6-34
6.7.5 PSU ................................................................................................6-35
6.8 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ....................................6-36
6.8.1 PRINTING ......................................................................................6-36
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side...........................................6-36
Blank Margin.......................................................................................6-37
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................6-37
Parallelogram Image Adjustment........................................................6-38
6.8.2 SCANNING.....................................................................................6-39
Registration: Platen Mode...................................................................6-39
Magnification.......................................................................................6-39
Standard White Density Adjustment ...................................................6-40
6.8.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT...........................................................6-41
Registration.........................................................................................6-41
Sub Scan Magnification ......................................................................6-41
6.8.4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION ..................................................6-42
7 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 7-1

7.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................7-1
7.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................7-2
7.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ....................................................................7-12
7.2.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON .................................7-12
vii
7.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE .........................................7-13
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis......................................................7-13
7.3 PAPER FEED TROUBLESHOOTING.....................................................7-15
7.4 SKEWED IMAGE ....................................................................................7-16
7.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................7-17
7.5.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................7-17
7.5.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................7-19
7.6 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................7-20
OPTIONS
PAPER TRAY UNIT (A860/B390)

1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ................................... B390-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................. B390-1
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................ B390-2
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. B390-3
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.................................... B390-4
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................. B390-5
2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .................................................. B390-6

2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM ............................. B390-6
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM ................................................................ B390-7
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION ................................................................. B390-9
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION ......................................................... B390-10
2.5 PAPER SIZE DETECTION............................................................... B390-12
2.6 SIDE AND END FENCES ................................................................ B390-13
Side Fences................................................................................. B390-13
End Fence ................................................................................... B390-13
3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT................................. B390-14

3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT..................................................... B390-14
3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT ............................................ B390-15
3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT...................................................... B390-15
3.4 RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .................................................. B390-16
3.5 UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .......................... B390-17
3.6 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ......................... B390-18
3.7 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT ........................................................ B390-19
3.8 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT......................................... B390-20
3.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ..................... B390-20
3.10 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT ....................................... B390-21
viii
LCT (A862/B391)
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ................................. B391-4
2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ................................. B391-5

2.1 PAPER FEED..................................................................................... B391-5
2.2 REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE .................. B391-6
2.3 TRAY LIFT ......................................................................................... B391-7
2.4 NEAR END/END DETECTION........................................................... B391-8
2.5 RIGHT TRAY SIDE FENCE ............................................................... B391-9
2.6 LEFT TRAY REAR FENCE ................................................................ B391-9
2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION ........................................ B391-10

3.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME........................ B391-11
3.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ............................................................ B391-11
3.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE ............................................. B391-12
3.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR ................................................ B391-12
3.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ......................................................................... B391-13
3.6 TRAY MOTOR.................................................................................. B391-14
3.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH AND RELAY CLUTCH............................... B391-15
3.8 PAPER FEED UNIT ......................................................................... B391-16
3.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END,
AND RELAY SENSORS .................................................................. B391-17
3.10 REAR FENCE MOTOR .................................................................. B391-18
3.11 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/REVERSE ROLLERS.............................. B391-19
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B386)

1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................. B386-5

2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION............................................................ B386-6
2.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ......................................................... B386-9
2.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION .......................................................... B386-10
2.4 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT................................................ B386-11
2.4.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS................................................... B386-11
ix
2.4.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ................................................. B386-12
2.4.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR................................... B386-13
2.5 STAMP ............................................................................................. B386-14
2.6 TIMING CHART................................................................................ B386-15
2.7 CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION.................................................. B386-16
2.8 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT .................................................. B386-17
3 SERVICE TABLES............................................................... B386-18

3.1 DIP SWITCHES................................................................................ B386-18

4.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVER ......................................................... B386-19
4.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT .................................................................... B386-20
4.3 LEFT COVER ................................................................................... B386-21
4.4 PICK-UP ROLLER............................................................................ B386-22
4.5 FEED BELT ...................................................................................... B386-23
4.6 SEPARATION ROLLER ................................................................... B386-24
4.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSOR ............................ B386-25
4.8 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR ............................................................... B386-26
4.9 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE .................................................................. B386-27
DF Feed Clutch............................................................................ B386-27
Pick-up Solenoid .......................................................................... B386-27
Transport Motor ........................................................................... B386-27
DF Feed Motor............................................................................. B386-27
4.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR............................................................. B386-28
4.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR .................... B386-29
INTERCHANGE UNIT (B300/B416)

1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................. B416-3
2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION .................................................... B416-4

2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM........................................................ B416-4
To the Exit Tray or Bridge Unit
(for the Upper Tray on top of the Bridge Unit, or the Finisher) ....... B416-4
To the 1-bin Tray............................................................................ B416-4
To the Duplex Unit ......................................................................... B416-4
3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT................................... B416-5

3.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT........................................................ B416-5
x
1-BIN TRAY UNIT (A898/B413)
1 OVERALL INFORMATION .................................................... B413-1

2.1 BASIC OPERATION........................................................................... B413-4

3.1 PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL............................................................. B413-5
SHIFT TRAY UNIT (B313/B459)

1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT..................................................................... B459-2

2.2 PRIMARY MECHANISMS .................................................................. B459-4
2.2.1 TRAY SHIFT.............................................................................. B459-4
2.2.2 HALF TURN DETECTION......................................................... B459-5

3.1 TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT ........................................................ B459-6
3.1.1 TRAY COVER REMOVAL......................................................... B459-6
3.1.2 TRAY COVER ATTACHMENT .................................................. B459-6
3.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT .......... B459-7
3.2.1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR ............................................. B459-7
3.2.2 REPLACING THE HALF TURN SENSOR:................................ B459-7
BY-PASS (A899/B415)

xi
2.2 PAPER SIZE DETECTION................................................................. B415-4

3.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER/FRICTION PAD/PAPER END SENSOR...... B415-5
3.2 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD......................................................... B415-6
3.3 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ..................................................................... B415-7
DUPLEX (A896/B414)
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................. B414-5

Longer than A4 sideways/LT sideways.......................................... B414-6
Up to A4 sideways/LT sideways .................................................... B414-7
2.2 FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM ..................................................... B414-8
When paper is fed into duplex unit:................................................ B414-8
Inversion and Exit: ......................................................................... B414-8

3.1 COVER REMOVAL ............................................................................ B414-9
3.2 ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT.......................................... B414-10
3.3 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT...................................................... B414-11
BRIDGE UNIT (A897/B417)

1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................. B417-5
2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION .................................................... B417-6

2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM........................................................ B417-6

3.1 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT .............................. B417-7
3.2 TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ............................................. B417-8
3.3 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT.................................................... B417-8
xii
1,000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)
1.1 MAIN PCB .......................................................................................... B408-1
1.2 STAPLER UNIT.................................................................................. B408-2
1.3 MOTORS............................................................................................ B408-3
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR.......................................................................... B408-3
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR .................................................................... B408-3
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR ................. B408-3
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................ B408-4
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS................................................................. B408-5
1.4.1 PREPARATION......................................................................... B408-5
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR ........................................................ B408-6
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR........................................... B408-6
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR .................................................... B408-6
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR ..................................................... B408-7
2 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................... B408-8

2.1 JAM DETECTION............................................................................... B408-8
3 SERVICE TABLES................................................................. B408-9

3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ................................................................... B408-9
4 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ................................................ B408-10

4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ......................................................................... B408-10
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................ B408-11
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.................................. B408-13
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... B408-15
4.5 JUNCTION GATES .......................................................................... B408-17
Upper tray mode .......................................................................... B408-17
Sort/stack mode........................................................................... B408-17
Staple mode................................................................................. B408-17
4.6 UPPER TRAY................................................................................... B408-18
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS ...................................... B408-19
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM ........................................................... B408-20
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM..................... B408-21
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE....................................................................... B408-22
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM ................................................................ B408-23
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM ................................. B408-24
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM ................................................. B408-25
5 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ................................. B408-26

5.1 SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................ B408-26
Upper Tray................................................................................... B408-26
Lower Tray................................................................................... B408-26
xiii
500-SHEET FINISHER (G302/B442)
1.1 EXTERIOR ......................................................................................... B442-1
1.2 ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE / PAPER EXIT UNIT............................. B442-4
1.3 ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE ............................................................. B442-5
1.4 PAPER EXIT UNIT GEAR / PADDLE ROLLER SOLENOID.............. B442-5
1.5 STAPLER UNIT.................................................................................. B442-6
1.6 JOGGER TRAY UNIT ........................................................................ B442-6
1.7 PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER ....................................................... B442-7
1.8 MAIN MOTOR .................................................................................... B442-7
1.9 JOGGER MOTOR .............................................................................. B442-8
1.10 CONTROL BOARD .......................................................................... B442-8
1.11 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT....................................................................... B442-9
2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ................................................ B442-10

2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ............................................. B442-10
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT .......................................................... B442-10
Mechanical component layout ..................................................... B442-10
Drive layout.................................................................................. B442-11
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ...................... B442-12
2.2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ........................................... B442-14
2.2.1 OUTPUT TRAY MECHANISM ................................................ B442-14
Stack height detection.................................................................. B442-14
Output tray up/down mechanism ................................................. B442-15
2.2.2 PAPER FEED.......................................................................... B442-16
Overview...................................................................................... B442-16
Straight feed out mode................................................................. B442-16
Shift sorting mode ........................................................................ B442-17
Stapling mode.............................................................................. B442-19
2.2.3 JAM CONDITIONS .................................................................. B442-20
2.2.4 ERROR DETECTION .............................................................. B442-20
3 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ................................. B442-21

3.1 SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. B442-21
xiv
10 August, 2001 SPECIFICATIONS
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
Information
Overall
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Desktop
Copy Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Originals: Sheet/Book
Original Size: Maximum A3/11" x 17"
Copy Paper Size: Maximum
A3/11" x 17"
Minimum
A5/81/2" x 51/2" lengthwise
Custom sizes
2nd paper tray
Width: 100 ~ 297 mm (3.9" ~ 11.5")
Length: 148 ~ 432 mm (5.8" ~ 17.0")
By-pass tray (Option):
Width: 90 ~ 305 mm (3.5" ~ 12.0")
Length: 148 ~ 1,260 mm (5.8" ~ 49.6")
Copy Paper Weight: Paper Tray:
60 ~ 105 g/m2, 16 ~ 28 lb (1st paper tray)
52 ~ 157 g/m2, 16 ~ 43 lb (2nd paper tray)
By-pass (Option):
52 ~ 157 g/m2, 16 ~ 42 lb
Reproduction Ratios: 5 Enlargement and 7 Reduction
A4/A3 Version LT/DLT Version

400% 400%
200% 200%
Enlargement 141% 155%
122% 129%
115% 121%
Full Size 100% 100%
93% 93%
87% 85%
82% 78%
Reduction 71% 73%
65% 65%
50% 50%
25% 25%
1-1
SPECIFICATIONS 10 August, 2001
Zoom: 25% to 400% in 1% steps (Platen mode)

25% to 200% in 1% steps (ADF mode)
Power Source: 120 V, 60 Hz:
More than 12 A (for North America)
220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz
More than 7 A (for Europe/Asia)
110 V, 50/60 Hz
More than 13 A (for Taiwan)
Power Consumption:
Mainframe Only Full System

120 V 220 ~ 240 V 120 V 220 ~ 240 V
Less than Less than Less than Less than
Maximum
1.44 kW 1.5 kW 1.44 kW 1.5 kW
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
Copying
650 Wh 650 Wh 680 Wh 680 Wh
Warm-up
1.44 kW 1.5 kW 1.44 kW 1.5 kW
Stand-by
150 Wh 150 Wh 160 Wh 160 Wh
Energy Saver / Auto Less than 10 W Less than 10 W Less than 10 W Less than 10 W
Off
NOTE: 1) Full system: Mainframe + ADF + 1-bin Sorter + Paper Tray Unit +
Duplex Unit + Bridge Unit + Finisher
2) Without the optional heaters, fax unit, and printer controller
Noise Emission (Sound Power Level):

Stand-by (Mainframe only): US/Asia Model: 40 dB(A)
Europe Model: 40 dB(A)
Operating (Mainframe only): US/Asia Model: 63 dB(A)
Europe Model: 63 dB(A)
Operating (Full System): 68.5 dB(A)
NOTE: 1) The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779.
2) Full System: Mainframe + ADF + 1-bin Sorter + Paper Tray Unit +
Duplex Unit + Bridge Unit + Finisher
1-2
10 August, 2001 SPECIFICATIONS
Information
Overall
Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 x 604 x 709 mm (21.7" x 23.8" x 28.0")
NOTE: Measurement Conditions
1) With the paper tray unit or LCT
2) Without the ADF
Weight: Less than 55 kg (121.3lb)
Copying Speed (copies/minute):
A4 sideways/
Russian-C2A A3/11" x 17"
11" x 81/2"
Non-memory copy mode 22 13
Memory copy mode 22 13
A4 sideways/
Russian-C2B A3/11" x 17"
11" x 81/2"
Non-memory copy mode 27 15
Memory copy mode 27 15

1) Not APS mode
2) A4/LT copying
3) Full size
Warm-up Time: Less than 10 seconds (20°C, 68°F) from when the
operation switch is turned on.
Less than 15 seconds (20°C, 68°F) from when the main
switch is turned on.
First Copy Time: Less than 4.9 s (A4), less than 5.0 s (LT)
1) When the polygonal mirror motor is spinning.
2) From the 1st paper tray
3) Not APS mode
4) Full size
Copy Number Input: Ten-key pad, 1 to 99 (count up or count down)
Manual Image Density: 7 steps
1-3
SPECIFICATIONS 10 August, 2001
Paper Tray Capacity: Paper Tray:

500 sheets x 2
(Special paper in the 2nd paper tray: 50 sheets)
Paper Tray Unit (Option):
500 sheets x 2
LCT (Option):
1000 sheets x 2
By-pass Tray (Option):
100 sheets (A4, B5, A5, B6, 81/2" x 11", 51/2" x 81/2")
10 sheets (A3, B4, 11" x 17", 81/2" x 13")
1 sheets (non-standard sizes)
NOTE: Copy paper weight: 80g/m2 (20 lb)
Toner Replenishment: Cartridge exchange (360 g/cartridge)
Toner Yield: 11 k copies (A4 sideways, 6% full black, 1 to 1 copying,
ADS mode)
Copy Tray Capacity: Copy Tray: 500 sheets (without 1-bin tray)
250 sheets (with 1-bin tray)
Memory Capacity: Standard 32 MB, Optional memory either 32 MB or
64MB
1-4
10 August, 2001 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Information
Overall
1.2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
12 13 1 2
11
3
4
10
5
B027V501.WMF
9 8 7
1-5
MACHINE CONFIGURATION 10 August, 2001
Machine
Version Item No. Comments
Code
Copier Copier(R-C2a) B022 13
Copier(R-C2b) B027 13
ARDF (Optional) B386 2 1), and new features added
Platen Cover (Optional) B406 1 Common with K-C1
Paper Tray Unit-2 tray (Optional) B390 8 1) and 2)
LCT (Optional) B391 7 1) and 2)
1-bin Tray (Optional) B413 3 1)
Shift Tray (Optional) B459 12 1)
Duplex Unit (Optional) B414 5 1) and 2)
By-pass Tray (Optional) B415 6 1)
Interchange Unit (Optional) B416 4 1)
Bridge Unit (Optional) B417 11 1) and 2)
1000-sheet finisher (Optional) B408 10 New option
500-sheet finisher (Optional) B442 9 1)
The components are the
same as the 500-finisher for
Russian-P2
User Account Enhance Unit B443 Common with A-C2
(Optional)
HDD (Optional) B420
Memory – 32 MB (Optional) G578 Common with A-C2
Memory – 64 MB (Optional) G579 Common with A-C2
Key Counter Bracket (Optional) B452 1)
Fax Fax Controller (Optional) B418
G3 Interface Unit (Optional) B448
ISDN (Optional) B449
Fax Function Expander A892 Common with R-C1
(Optional)
Handset (Optional) B433 Common with Kir-C
Printer / Printer Unit (Optional) B461
Scanner Printer/Scanner Unit (Optional) B453
PS3 (Optional) B462
NIB (Optional) G335
IEEE1394 (Optional) G590 Common with A-C2
Comments:
The following are the differences between Russian-C1 and this machine.
1) New color for the exterior cover
2) The drive motor and the control board have been changed so they will be
compatible with R-C2c (32 cpm machine)
1-6
10 August, 2001 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1.2.2 INSTALLABLE OPTION TABLE
Information
Overall
Copier options
Russian-
No. Option Note
C2A/C2B
1 ARDF (Optional) ! Install either no. 1 or 2.
2 Platen Cover (Optional) ! Install either no. 1 or 2.
3 Paper Tray Unit – two-tray ! Install either no. 3 or 4.
(Optional)
4 LCT (Optional) ! Install either no. 3 or 4.
5 1-bin Tray (Optional) ∆ Requires no.9.
6 Shift Tray (Optional) ! Install either no. 6 or 10.
7 Duplex Unit (Optional) ∆ Requires no.9.
8 By-pass Tray (Optional) !
9 Interchange Unit (Optional) !
10 Bridge Unit (Optional) ∆ No. 10 requires no.11 or
12.
Install either no. 6 or 10.
11 1000-sheet Finisher (Optional) ∆ Install either no. 11 or 12
Requires no.10, and either
no.3 or 4
12 500-sheet Finisher (Option) ∆ Install either no. 11 or 12
Requires no.10, and either
no.3 or 4
13 Memory 32 MB/ 64 MB (Optional) !
14 Key Counter Bracket !
! = Available ∆ = Requires another option
Fax option
All options for the fax unit are available when the fax unit has been installed.
Printer/scanner options
1. The NIB and IEEE1394 cannot both be installed at the same time.
2. The printer/scanner option requires the NIB and 64MB memory options.
3. The printer option requires the 64MB memory option.
1-7
PAPER PATH 10 August, 2001
1.3 PAPER PATH

1
2
8
B022V155.WMF
1. Optional ADF
2. Optional 1-bin Tray
3. Optional Interchange Unit
4. Optional Duplex Unit
5. Optional By-pass Feed Tray
6. Optional Paper Tray Unit
7. Optional 1000-sheet Finisher
8. Optional Bridge Unit
1-8
10 August, 2001 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
Information
Overall
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
28
9
27
10
11
26
12
13
14
25 15
16
24
17
23 18
19
20
B027V502.WMF
22 21
1-9
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 10 August, 2001
1. 2nd scanner 15. Development roller

2. Original width sensor 16. ID sensor
3. Exposure lamp 17. Registration roller
4. 1st scanner 18. Friction pad
5. Original length sensor 19. Paper feed roller
6. Lens 20. Paper size sensor
7. Scanner motor 21. Bottom plate
8. SBU board 22. Tray heater
9. Exit roller 23. Polygon mirror motor
10. Fusing hot roller 24. Laser unit
11. Fusing pressure roller 25. Toner supply bottle holder
12. Cleaning unit 26. Drum charge roller
13. OPC drum 27. Anti-condensation heater
14. Transfer roller 28. Scanner home position sensor
1-10
10 August, 2001 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Information
Overall
Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the point-to-point
diagram for the location of the components.
Symbol Name Function

Motors
M1 Scanner Drives the 1st and 2nd scanners.
M2 Polygonal Mirror Turns the polygonal mirror.
M3 Main Drives the main unit components.
M4 Exhaust Fan Removes heat from around the fusing unit.
M5 Upper Paper Lift Raises the bottom plate in the 1st paper tray.
M6 Lower Paper Lift Raises the bottom plate in the 2nd paper tray.
Toner Supply Rotates the toner bottle to supply toner to the
M7
development unit.
Magnetic Clutches
MC1 Upper Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the 1st paper tray.
MC2 Lower Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the 2nd paper tray.
MC3 Upper Relay Drives the upper relay rollers.
MC4 Lower Relay Drives the lower relay rollers.
MC4 Registration Drives the registration rollers.
Switches
Provides power to the machine. If this is off, there is
SW1 Main
no power supplied to the machine.
SW2 Right Upper Cover Detects whether the right upper cover is open or not.
Cuts the +5VLD and +24V dc power line and detects
SW3 Right Cover
whether the right cover is open or not.
SW4 Right Lower Cover Detects whether the right lower cover is open or not.
Determines what size of paper is in the upper paper
SW5 Upper Paper Size
tray.
Determines what size of paper is in the lower paper
SW6 Lower Paper Size
tray.
SW7 New PCU Detect Detects when a new PCU is installed.
Cuts the +5VLD and +24V dc power line and detects
SW8 Front Cover Safety
whether the front cover is open or not.
Provides power for machine operation. The machine
SW9 Operation
still has power if this switch is off.
Sensors
Informs the CPU when the 1st and 2nd scanners are
S1 Scanner HP
at home position.
Informs the CPU that the platen cover is in the up or
S2 Platen Cover
down position (related to the APS/ARE functions).
Detects original width. This is one of the APS (Auto
S3 Original Width
Paper Select) sensors.
Detects original length. This is one of the APS (Auto
S4 Original Length 1
1-11
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS 10 August, 2001

Detects original length. This is one of the APS (Auto
S5 Original Length 2
Detects the amount of toner inside the development
S6 Toner Density (TD)
unit.
Informs the CPU when the 1st paper tray runs out of
S7 1st Paper End
paper.
Informs the CPU when the 2nd paper tray runs out of
S8 2nd Paper End
paper.
Detects the density of various patterns and the
S9 Image Density (ID)
reflectivity of the drum for process control.
S10 Paper Overflow Detects paper overflow in the built-in copy tray.
S11 Paper Exit Detects misfeeds.
S12 Upper Relay Detects misfeeds.
S13 Lower Relay Detects misfeeds.
Detects misfeeds and controls registration clutch off-
S14 Registration
on timing.
Detects when the paper in the 1st paper tray is at the
S15 1st Paper Lift
feed height.
Detects when the paper in the 2nd paper tray is at
S16 2nd Paper Lift
the feed height.
S17 1st Paper Height – 1 Detects the amount of paper in the 1st paper tray.
S18 1st Paper Height – 2 Detects the amount of paper in the 1st paper tray.
S19 2nd Paper Height – 1 Detects the amount of paper in the 2nd paper tray.
S20 2nd Paper Height – 2 Detects the amount of paper in the 2nd paper tray.
PCBs
Controls all applications both directly and through
PCB1 Controller
other control boards.
Provides dc power to the system and ac power to
PCB2 PSU (Power Supply Unit)
the fusing lamp and heaters.
SBCU (Scanner & Base Controls the fusing lamp and the mechanical parts of
PCB3
Engine Control Unit) the machine.
Contains the CCD, and outputs a video signal to the
PCB4 SBU (Sensor Board Unit)
BICU board.
PCB5 Lamp Stabilizer Stabilizes the power to the exposure lamp.
PCB6 LDD (Laser Diode Driver) Controls the laser diode.
PCB7 Operation Panel Controls the operation panel.
Supplies high voltage to the drum charge roller,
PCB8 High Voltage Supply
development roller, and transfer roller.
Expands the memory capacity for the copier, printer,
PCB9 Memory (Option)
and scanner features.
IPU (Image Processing
PCB10 Performs the image processing functions.
Unit)
Solenoids
SOL1 Fusing Drive Release Releases the drive for the fusing unit.
Lamps
Applies high intensity light to the original for
L1 Exposure Lamp
exposure.
1-12
10 August, 2001 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Information
L2 Main Fusing Lamp Heats the center of the hot roller.
Overall
L3 Secondary Fusing Lamp Heats both ends of the hot roller.
Quenching Lamp Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum
L4
surface after cleaning.
Heaters
Anti-condensation Turns on when the main power switch is off to
H1
(Option) prevent moisture from forming on the optics.
Turns on when the main power switch is off to
H2 Tray (Option) prevent moisture from forming around the paper
trays.
Others
Opens the fusing lamp circuit if the fusing unit
TS1 Fusing Thermostats
overheats.
TH1 Fusing Thermistors Detects the temperature of the hot roller.
Laser Synchronization Detects the laser beam at the start of the main scan.
LSD 1
Detector
CO1 Mechanical Counter Keeps track of the total number of prints made.
Used for control of authorized use. If this feature is
CO2 Key Counter (Option) enabled for copying, copying will be impossible until
it is installed.
1-13
DRIVE LAYOUT 10 August, 2001
1.6 DRIVE LAYOUT

Scanner 1
B027V301.WMF
Fusing
6
PCU/Transfer Drive
7
B027V302.WMF
1. Scanner Drive Motor

2. Main Motor
3. Registration Clutch
4. Upper Paper Feed Clutch
5. Upper Transport Clutch
6. Lower Paper Feed Clutch
7. Lower Transport Clutch
1-14
10 August, 2001 COPY PROCESS
1.7 COPY PROCESS
Information
Overall
1.7.1 OVERVIEW
1
B027V401.WMF
8
9
2
6
3
5
4
B027V101.WMF
1. EXPOSURE
A xenon lamp exposes the original. Light reflected from the original passes to
the CCD, where it is converted into an analog data signal. This data is
converted to a digital signal, processed and stored in the memory. At the time
of printing, the data is retrieved and sent to the laser diode. For multi-copy runs,
the original is scanned once only and stored to the memory.
2. DRUM CHARGE
In the dark, the charge roller gives a negative charge to the organic photo-
conductive (OPC) drum. The charge remains on the surface of the drum
because the OPC layer has a high electrical resistance in the dark.
1-15
COPY PROCESS 10 August, 2001
3. LASER EXPOSURE
The processed data scanned from the original is retrieved from the memory
and transferred to the drum by a laser beam, which forms an electrical latent
image on the drum surface. The amount of charge remaining as a latent image
on the drum depends on the laser beam intensity, which is controlled by the
BICU board.
4. DEVELOPMENT
The magnetic developer brush on the development rollers comes in contact
with the latent image on the drum surface. Toner particles are electrostatically
attached to the areas of the drum surface where the laser reduced the negative
charge on the drum.
5. ID SENSOR
The laser forms a sensor pattern on the drum surface. The ID sensor measures
the reflectivity of the pattern. The output signal is one of the factors used for
toner supply control. Also, the ID sensor measures the reflectivity of the drum
surface. The output signal is used for charge roller voltage control.
6. IMAGE TRANSFER
Paper is fed to the area between the drum surface and the transfer roller at the
proper time for aligning the copy paper and the developed image on the drum
surface. Then, the transfer roller applies a high positive charge to the reverse
side of the paper. This positive charge pulls the toner particles from the drum
surface onto the paper. At the same time, the paper is electrostatically attracted
to the transfer roller.
7. PAPER SEPARATION
Paper separates from the drum as a result of the electrostatic attraction
between the paper and the transfer roller. The discharge plate helps separate
the paper from the drum.
8. CLEANING
The cleaning blade removes any toner remaining on the drum surface after the
image transfers to the paper.
9. QUENCHING
The light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the charge on the
drum surface.
1-16
10 August, 2001 BOARD STRUCTURE
1.8 BOARD STRUCTURE
Information
Overall
1.8.1 OVERVIEW
NIB IEEE1394
: Standard
Controller
: Option Fax
Fax Unit
Options HDD
Operation
Panel
LD Unit
Xenon Lamp
IPU
Paper
APS Lamp Scanner Polygon
Tray Unit/ ARDF SBU
Sensors Stabilizer Motor Motor
LCT LSD
SBCU PSU
High
Fusing Lamps
Bridge Clutches/ Ther-
By-pass Duplex 1-Bin Tray Finisher Sensors Motors Voltage
Unit Solenoids mistors
P.P
B027V500.WMF
1-17
BOARD STRUCTURE 10 August, 2001
This machine uses the GW (Ground Work) architecture, which allows the copier to
be expanded as an MFP by installing simple modular components (ROM DIMMs)
on the controller board.
1. Controller (Main Board)

Controls the memory and all peripheral devices.
2. SBCU (Scanner & Base Engine Control Unit)

This is the scanner and engine control board. It controls the following functions:
• Engine sequence
• Timing control for peripherals
• Operation control
• Drive control for the sensors, motors, and solenoids of the printer and
scanner
• High voltage supply board control
• Serial interfaces with peripherals
• Fusing control
3. IPU (Image Processing Board)
This is the scanned image processing board. It controls the following functions.
• Image processing control
• Video control
4. SBU (Sensor Board Unit)
The SBU deals with the analog signals from the CCD and converts them into
digital signals.
1-18
10 August, 2001 BOARD STRUCTURE
1.8.2 CONTROLLER
Information
Overall
OPTION
Fax
or
Printer
OPTION
(Fax)
or OPTION OPTION OPTION
Printer/ NIB
2.5" HDD RAM
IEEE1284 IC Card Scanner PS3 Flash ROM
(32/64 MB)
(Fax) (4 MB)
SDRAM
IC Card I/F IDE Slot 1 Slot 2
DIMM
CONTROLLER
Flash ROM DIMM (4/8 MB)
Local BUS
System Resident
NVRAM NVRAM
Flash ROM SDRAM SIMAC CPU
(32 kB) (32 kB)
(8 MB) (32 MB)
OPTION
PCI BUS
PCI PCI PCI
Operation Panel
IPU IEEE1394 FCU NCU
Flash ROM (4 MB)
OPTION OPTION OPTION
SBCU
B027V503.WMF
The controller employs GW (Ground Work) architecture, which allows the board to
control all applications, including copier, printer, scanner, and fax applications. To
add the optional printer, scanner, or fax applications, ROM DIMMs must be
installed on the controller. The fax option, however, requires FCU and NCU
installation also.
The following systems and application software can be downloaded from the
controller’s IC Card slot.
• Controller (System OS/Copier) • Fax
• Operation panel • PostScript 3
• SBCU (engine control) • NIB
• Printer • FCU
• Scanner
For details about how to download software from an IC card, see “Software
Download” in 4.3. Program Download.
1-19
BOARD STRUCTURE 10 August, 2001
1. CPU. QED RM5231. Clock frequency: 200 MHz.

2. SIMAC ASIC. This is a dedicated chip developed for use with GW architecture.
The CPU and memory I/F employ a 100 MHz bus (32 bit). These components
perform CPU and I/F control and also control all of the following functions:
memory, local bus, interrupts, PCI bus, video data, HDD, network, operation
panel, IEEE1284, and image processing.
3. SDRAM. This is a 32 MB RAM chip, expandable with a 32 MB or 64 MB
SDRAM.
4. System Flash ROM. 8 MB Flash ROM for the system OS and copier
application.
5. Flash ROM DIMM Slots. Two slots are provided for two ROM DIMMs (4 MB or
8MB). Expansion slots provided for the optional printer, scanner, facsimile, and
PostScript 3 applications.
6. NVRAM. 32 KB of NVRAM are provided for the system. The NVRAM stores
many settings, including OS system log information, copier calendar, current
system settings, user accounts (max. 100) and all settings for the fax, printer,
scanner, and network. The NVRAM also has an RTC (Real Time Clock) for
time management.
NOTE: Optional NVRAM, which can store up to 400 user accounts, can be
installed on the controller.
7. HDD. A 2.5" HDD (more than 6 GB) can be connected using an IDE I/F. The
hard disk is partitioned as shown below.
Partition Size Function Power OFF Comment
File System 1 500MB Downloaded fonts, Remains
forms.
File System 2 200MB Job spooling area. Erased
File System 3 1500MB Work data area Remains Used for document
server application.
Image TMP 900MB Collation, sample Erased Commonly used area
print, locked print. for applications. Stores
1
Image LS* 1640MB Document server, Remains copy, printer, fax, and
local storage archive scanner data.
Storage capacity:
About 9000 pages
(3,000 files)
Image Area 20MB Stores image area Remains
Management information
Job Log 10MB Job log. Remains
Total 4.8GB Remains
*1
When an application uses an image page, first it uses the Image LS area. If
this area is in use and not available, then it uses the Image TMP area.
1-20
10 August, 2001 SCANNING
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 SCANNING
2.1.1 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
[E] [A] [C] [B]
Detailed
[G] [F] [D]
B027D556.WMF
The original is illuminated by the exposure lamp (a xenon lamp in this model) [A].
The image is reflected onto a CCD (charge coupled device) [B] via the 1st, 2nd, 3rd
mirrors, and lens [C].
The 1st scanner [D] consists of the exposure lamp, a reflector [E], and the 1st
mirror [F].
A lamp stabilizer energizes the exposure lamp. The light reflected by the reflector is
of almost equal intensity, to reduce shadows on pasted originals.
An optics anti-condensation heater [G] is available as an option. It can be installed
on the left side of the scanner. It turns on whenever the power cord is plugged in.
2-1
SCANNING 10 August, 2001
2.1.2 SCANNER DRIVE

[H]
[G]
[B] [A]
[C]
[D]
[G] [E]
[F]
B022D002.WMF
[E]
A stepper motor drives the scanner. The 1st and 2nd scanners [A,B] are driven by
the scanner drive motor [C] through the timing belt [D], scanner drive pulley [E],
scanner drive shaft [F], and two scanner wires [G].
- Book mode -
The scanner drive board controls and operates the scanner drive motor. In full size
mode, the 1st scanner speed is 150 mm/s during scanning. The 2nd scanner
speed is half that of the 1st scanner.
In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the
magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or
magnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by
changing the scanner drive motor speed, and in the main scan direction it is done
by image processing on the IPU board.
Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner
drive motor speed using SP4009. Magnification in the main scan direction can be
adjusted using SP4008.
- ADF mode -
The scanners are always kept at their home position (the scanner H.P sensor [H]
detects the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ADF motor feeds the original
through the ADF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the
sub-scan direction is done by changing the ADF motor speed. Magnification in the
main scan direction is done in the IPU board, like for book mode.
Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the ADF motor
speed using SP6006. In the main scan direction, it can be adjusted with SP4008,
like for book mode.
2-2
10 August, 2001 SCANNING
2.1.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE
[D]
Descriptions
Detailed
[A]
[B]
B027D554.WMF
[C]
In the optics cavity for original size detection, there are four reflective sensors in
the 115V machines ([A] and [B]), and six reflective sensors in the 230V machines.
The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length
sensors [B] and [C] detect the original length. These are the APS (Auto Paper
Select) sensors. Each APS sensor is a reflective photosensor.
While the main switch is on, these sensors are active and the original size data is
always sent to the CPU. However, the CPU checks the data only when the platen
cover sensor [D] is activated. This is when the platen is positioned about 15 cm
above the exposure glass, for example while it is being closed. The CPU can
recognize the original size from the combination of on/off signals from the APS
sensors.
If the copy is made with the platen fully open, the CPU decides the original size
from the sensor outputs when the Start key is pressed.
2-3
SCANNING 10 August, 2001
L2 L1
L4 L3
W2
W1
B027D555.WMF
Original Size Length Sensor Width Sensor

A4/A3 LT/DLT
L4 L3 L2 L1 W2 W1
version version
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O O
B4 10" x 14" O O O O O X
Foolscap 8.5" x 13" O O O X X X
A4-L 8.5" x 11" O O X X X X
B5-L O X X X X X
A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X X O O
B5-S X X X X O X
A5-L, A5-S X X X X X X
NOTE: 1) L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: High (paper present), X: Low

2) The length sensors L3 and L4 are used only for 230V machines.
For other combinations, "CANNOT DETECT ORIG. SIZE" will be indicated on the
operation panel display (if SP 4-303 is kept at the default setting).
The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This
original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and
increases the machine's productivity.
However, if the by-pass feeder is used, note that the machine assumes that the
copy paper is lengthwise. For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the by-
pass tray, the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans the full A3 area for the
first copy of each page of the original, disregarding the original size sensors.
However, for each page, the data signal to the laser diode is stopped to match the
copy paper length detected by the registration sensor.
Original size detection using the ADF is described in the manual for the ADF.
2-4
10 August, 2001 IMAGE PROCESSING
2.2 IMAGE PROCESSING

2.2.1 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
Detailed
PCI BUS
Fax (FCU Board)
CCD
SBU IPU-A
Controller
Printer/Scanner
IPU-B
LD
Controller SIMAC
(VCU)
LD
Drum
Driver Video
FCI
Controller
IPU HDD
LDD
B027D504.WMF
The CCD generates an analog video signal. The SBU (Sensor Board Unit)
converts the analog signal to an 8-bit digital signal, then it sends the digital signal
to the IPU (Image Processing Unit) board.
The IPU board performs the image processing, such as auto shading, filtering,
magnification, gradation processing.
The SIMAC on the controller board performs the image editing, such as image
repeat, double copy.
Finally, the IPU board sends the video data to the LD drive board.
2-5
IMAGE PROCESSING 10 August, 2001
2.2.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT)
SBU IPU
O Analog
A/D 1 8 bit data
Processing IC1
CCD
IPU-A
E Analog
A/D 2 8 bit data
Processing IC2
B027D505.WMF
The CCD converts the light reflected from the original into an analog signal. The
CCD line has 7,450 pixels and the resolution is 600 dpi (23.6 lines/mm).
The CCD has two output lines, for odd and even pixels, to the analog processing
IC. The analog processing IC performs the following operations on the signals from
the CCD:
1. Z/C (Zero Clamp):

Adjusts the black level reference for even pixels to match the odd pixels.
2. Signal Amplification:
The analog signal is amplified by operational amplifiers in the AGC circuit.
3. Auto Gain Control
Adjusts the gain curve for the scanned image density.
After the above processing, the analog signals are converted to 8-bit signals by the
A/D converter. This will give a value for each pixel on a scale of 256 grades. Then,
the digitized image data goes to the IPU board.
2-6
2.2.3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY
0.5mm [A]
20mm
Descriptions
Detailed
80mm
Sub scan direction
B027D552.WMF
ADS prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies.

The copier scans the auto image density detection area [A] as shown in the
diagram. This corresponds to a few mm at one end of the main scan line. As the
scanner scans down the page, the SBU detects the peak white level for each scan
line. The IPU performs the ADS function in accordance with the peak white level.
When an original with a gray background is scanned, the density of the gray area
is the peak white level density. Therefore, the original background will not appear
on copies. Because peak level data is taken for each scan line, ADS corrects for
any changes in background density down the page.
As with previous digital copiers, the user can select manual image density when
selecting auto image density mode, and the machine will use both settings when
processing the original.
2-7
2.2.4 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)

Overview
PCI BUS
Fax (FCU Board)
SBU IPU-A
Controller
Printer/Scanner
IPU-B
LDD
SIMAC
VCU
FCI Video
Controller
IPU HDD
B027D507.WMF
The image data from the SBU goes to the IPU (Image Processing Unit) ICs on the
SBCU board, which carry out the following processes on the image data.
IPU-A
• Auto shading
• Pre-filtering
• Magnification
• Test pattern generation
IPU-B
• Filtering (MTF and smoothing)
• ID gamma correction
• Grayscale processing
• Binary picture processing
• Error diffusion
• Dithering
Video Controller
• Video path control
The image data then goes to the LD driver (LDD).
2-8
Image Processing Modes

The user can select one of the following modes with the User Tools screen: Text,
Text/Photo, Photo, Pale, Generation. Each of these modes has a range of different
settings (e.g. Soft, Normal, Sharp, etc). For each mode, a Custom Setting option is
also available. This Custom Setting holds the values selected with the SP modes,
which can be adjusted to meet special requirements that cannot be covered by the
Descriptions
standard settings.
Detailed
To display this screen, press User Tools/Counter , press Copier/Document
Server Settings, press the General Features tab, and then press Copy Quality.
B027D800.WMF
Mode Function
Best reproduction of text and sharp lines. Ignores background
Text
texture. (☛ p.2-11 Text Mode)
Good reproduction of mixed text and photographs with accurate
Text/Photo grayscaling, better than that achieved in the Text mode. (☛ p.2-13
Text/Photo Mode)
Photo Best possible reproduction of photographs. (☛ p.2-12 Photo Mode)
Reproduction similar to text mode, but of lower contrast. Ideal for
Pale
copying thin originals. (☛ p.2-14 Pale Mode)
Attempts to achieve the best reproduction of copied originals that
Generation
are faded because they are copies of copies. (☛ p.2-15 Generation
Copy
Copy)
In addition, there are two main image processing modes: grayscale processing and
binary picture processing. When no optional hard disk has been installed, the
machine uses binary picture processing. However, when the optional hard disk has
been installed, the machine uses grayscale processing. The user or technician
cannot select the mode.
2-9
Image Processing Path
Overview
This diagram shows the various stages of the image process and where they are
done.
SBU
• ADS
IPU
IPU-A
• Auto Shading
• Pre-Filtering
• Magnification
• Characteristic Detection
IPU-B
• Filtering
• ID Gamma Correction HDD
• Error Diffusion
• Dithering Printer/
• Binary Picture Processing Scanner
• Grayscale Processing
• Memory Control
Video Path Control • Compression
Controller
LD Unit Fax Unit
B027D559.WMF
2-10
SP Modes for Each Image Processing Step

The following tables show which settings and SP modes are used for each image
processing step.
Text Mode
Descriptions
Text Mode
Detailed
Custom
Soft Normal Sharp
Setting
ADS (SBU) As selected at the operation panel
Shading ~34%
Enabled
Correction 35%~
Small ~34% Three-line filter
Smoothing Filter 35%~ One-line filter
Main Scan ~34%
Enabled
Magnification 35%~
~34%
Mirroring Enabled only in the ADF mode
35%~
Characteristic ~34% None
Detection 35%~ Weak Middle Strong 4-903-2 ~ 4
MTF
~34% MTF (Weak) MTF (Strong) 4-903-1
MTF/Smoothing (Medium)
Filter Character Character Character
35%~ 4-903-2 ~ 4
(Weak) (Medium) (Strong)
Independent Dot ~34% None
4-904-1
Erase 35%~ None
Background ~34% None
4-904-6
Erase 35%~ None
~34% Text
γ Correction 4-904-11
35%~ Character (Text)
Binary
~34% Normal error diffusion picture 4-903-1
processing
Gradation
Binary
35%~ Character error diffusion picture 4-903-2 ~ 4
processing
Line Width ~34%
2-907-1
Correction 35%~
2-11
Photo Mode
Photo Mode
Glossy Custom
Coarse Print Print Photo
Photo Setting
Shading ~34%
Enabled
Correction 35%~
Main Scan ~34%
Enabled
Magnification 35%~
~34%
35%~
Characteristic ~34% None
Detection 35%~ None 4-903-6 ~ 8
MTF/Smoothing ~34% Character Smoothing 4-903-5
Filter 35%~ Smoothing Character 4-903-6 ~ 8
4-904-2
Erase 35%~ None
4-904-7
Erase 35%~ None
~34% Dither Dither
γ Correction (16x16) Dither (8x8) 4-904-12
35%~ (Character)
Normal error
~34% 4-903-5
diffusion
Dither
Gradation Dither (8x8) Character
(16x16)
35%~ error 4-903-6 ~ 8
diffusion
Line Width ~34%
2-907-2
Correction 35%~
2-12
Text/Photo Mode
Text/Photo Mode
Photo Custom
Normal Text Priority
priority Setting
Descriptions
Shading ~34%
Detailed
Enabled
Correction 35%~
Main Scan ~34%
Enabled
Magnification 35%~
~34%
35%~
~34% None
Characteristic
Strong Middle Weak 4-903-10 ~
Detection 35%~
12
MTF
Filter Character Character Character 4-903-10 ~
35%~
(Weak) (Medium) (Strong) 12
4-904-3
Erase 35%~ None
4-904-8
Erase 35%~ None
~34% Text/Photo
35%~ Character (Text/Photo)
~34% Normal error diffusion
Gradation
35%~ Character error diffusion
Line Width ~34%
2-907-3
Correction 35%~
2-13
Pale Mode
Pale Mode
Photo Custom
priority Setting
Shading ~34%
Enabled
Correction 35%~
Main Scan ~34%
Enabled
Magnification 35%~
~34%
35%~
~34% None
Characteristic
Weak Middle Strong 4-903-14 ~
Detection 35%~
16
MTF
35%~
4-904-4
Erase 35%~ None
4-904-9
Erase 35%~ None
~34% Pale
35%~ Character (Pale)
Gradation
Line Width ~34%
2-907-4
Correction 35%~
2-14
Generation Copy
Generation Copy Mode

Photo Custom
priority Setting
Descriptions
Shading ~34%
Detailed
Enabled
Correction 35%~
Main Scan ~34%
Enabled
Magnification 35%~
~34%
35%~
~34% None
Characteristic
Weak Middle Strong 4-903-18 ~
Detection 35%~
20
MTF
35%~
Independent Dot ~34% Weak
4-904-5
Erase 35%~ Weak
Background ~34% Weak
4-904-10
Erase 35%~ Weak
~34% Generation copy
35%~ Character (Generation copy)
Gradation
Line Width ~34%
2-907-5
Correction 35%~
2-15
Auto Shading
Auto shading does two things.
• Zeroes the black level for each scan line of data.
• Corrects for variations in white level across the main scan.
Pre-Filtering
Pre-filter smoothes mainly parallel lines in the main scan direction and extended
lines in the sub-scan direction. This reduces moiré and spurious noise in images.
Main Scan Magnification/Reduction

Changing the scanner speed enables reduction and enlargement in the sub-scan
direction. However, the IPU-A chip handles reduction and enlargement in the main
scan direction. The processing for main scan magnification/reduction is the same
as in the previous digital machines.
Mirroring for ADF Mode
[A]
B027D564.WMF
When making a copy using the ADF, the magnification circuit creates a mirror
image. This is because the scanning starting position in the main scan direction is
at the other end of the scan line in ADF mode (compared with platen mode). In
platen mode, the original is placed face down on the exposure glass, and the
corner at [A] is at the start of the main scan. The scanner moves down the page. In
ADF mode, the ADF feeds the leading edge of the original to the DF exposure
glass, and the opposite top corner of the original is at the main scan start position.
To create the mirror image, the IPU-A stores each line in a LIFO (Last In First Out)
memory.
2-16
Characteristic Detection
This function uses software filters to detect edge areas, non-edge areas, and areas
of shaded dot patterns.
The result determines the image processing that will be applied to each pixel.
Filtering
Descriptions
Detailed
Overview
There are some software filters for enhancing the desired image qualities of the
selected original mode. These filters are the MTF filter, the smoothing filter,
characteristic filter, and independent dot erase.
Depending on the original mode and the reproduction ratio, the machine will use
either MTF/smoothing, or the filter determined by characteristic detection.
If MTF/smoothing is used, it is applied to all areas of the original, regardless of
whether they are edge areas, non-edge areas, or independent dots.
• The MTF filter emphasizes sharpness and is used in all original types except
Photo mode.
• The smoothing filter is used in Photo mode.
If the characteristic filter is used, the filter for each pixel depends on the image data
type that was detected by characteristic detection.
MTF Filter
An MTF filter is used for all original types except Photo mode.
When the reproduction ratio is less than 35%, this filter is applied to all image data
pixels, regardless of whether they are in an edge area or non-edge area.
When the reproduction ratio is 35% or more, the type of MTF filter used for each
pixel depends on the results of characteristic detection.
Smoothing Filter
A smoothing filter is used in Photo mode instead of MTF. It is applied to all image
data pixels, regardless of whether they are in an edge area or non-edge area.
With some combinations of reproduction ratio and image mode, the type of
smoothing used for each pixel depends on the results of characteristic detection
(see the Photo mode table in SP Modes for Each Processing Step).
Characteristic Filter
A characteristic filter is applied instead of MTF, smoothing, and ID gamma
correction with some combinations of original type and reproduction ratio. See the
‘SP Modes for Each Processing Step’ section.
For example, In text mode, for the ‘Normal’ original type, if the reproduction ratio is
less than 35%, MTF (medium) is used for all pixels in the image. However, if the
reproduction ratio is 35% or more, the ‘medium’ characteristic filter is used, and the
processing depends on whether the pixel was in an edge area, a non-edge area, or
in an area shaded using a dot pattern.
2-17
Each characteristic filter consists of a combination of the following features: MTF,

smoothing, error diffusion, dithering, ID gamma correction. For each of these
features, the machine chooses from two types when making up a characteristic
filter.
Independent Dot Erase
Independent dot erase removes unwanted dots from the image.
Independent dot erase is enabled only for Generation Copy mode (according to the
default settings). However, for the “Custom Setting” original modes, independent
dot detection can be enabled and adjusted with SP4-904-2~4. With a larger SP
setting, more dots are detected as independent dots and erased, even if the dot
density is high. However, dots in mesh-like images may be mistakenly detected as
independent dots.
Background Erase
By default, this process is disabled in all original modes. However, it can be
enabled with SP mode.
Usually, dirty background is erased using the Auto Image Density (ADS) function.
However, sometimes, dirty background areas will still appear. These can be erased
with this function.
The threshold level for erasing can be changed with SP4-904-6~10.
ID Gamma (γ) Correction

The machine automatically selects the most appropriate ID gamma correction
based on the selected original type.
Also, for certain combinations of reproduction ratio and original type, characteristic
detection is used. In this case, the machine can use one of two gamma correction
tables. The one that is used is decided separately for each pixel, and depends on
the results of characteristic detection.
Gradation Processing
Overview
There are four types of gradation processing:
• Grayscale processing: This has 4 output levels for each pixel.
• Binary picture processing: This has only two output levels (black and white).
• Error diffusion: There are two error diffusion processing types (normal and
characteristic detection)
• Dithering: There are two dithering processing types (normal and characteristic
detection).
2-18
Grayscale Processing
In this machine, the 8-bit image data is converted into 2-bit data. This produces up
to 4 image density levels for each pixel.
To realize this, this machine uses a form of pulse width modulation. In this
machine, pulse width modulation consists of the following processes:
• Laser diode pulse positioning
Descriptions
• Laser diode power/pulse width modulation
Detailed
Laser diode power and pulse width modulation is done by the laser diode drive
board (LDD). Briefly, the width of the laser pulse for a pixel depends on the output
level (image density level: from 0 to 255) required for the pixel.
Note that although the LDD can create 256 levels per pixel, the machine only uses
8 of these, and only four are used for any one job. A gamma table determines
which four output levels are used. The gamma table is different for each original
type setting.
Binary Picture Processing
The 8-bit image data is converted into 1-bit data (black and white image data).
Error Diffusion
The error diffusion process reduces the difference in contrast between light and
dark areas of a halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference
between it and the surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are compared with an
error diffusion matrix.
There are two types of error diffusion processing: One is ‘normal’. The other is part
of the characteristic detection process, in which the error diffusion method is
determined separately for each pixel. The error diffusion type (normal or
characteristic) depends on the reproduction ratio and the original type (refer to the
SP Modes for Each Image Processing Step tables).
Dithering
Each pixel is compared with the pixel in the same position in a dither matrix.
Several matrixes are available, to increase or decrease the detail on the copy.
Line width correction

This function is effective in all original modes.
Usually, lines will bulge in the main scan direction as a result of the
negative/positive development system that is used in this model. So, pixels on
edges between black and white areas are compared with adjacent pixels, and if the
pixel is on a line, the line thickness will be reduced.
Line width correction is done in the VCU chip on the LDD board.
The line width correction type can be selected with SP2-907.
2-19
2.2.5 VIDEO CONTROL UNIT (VCU)

Fine Character and Image (FCI)
The FCI circuit performs image smoothing.
Main Scan Direction

4/4 3/4 2/4 1/4 0
Sub Scan
Direction
Fig. A
Fig. B
Fig. C
B027D574.WMF
Usually, binary picture processing generates jagged edges on characters, as

shown in the above illustration. These are reduced using edge smoothing. The FCI
changes the laser pulse duration and position for certain pixels.
Fig. A shows the four possible pulse durations, and Fig. B shows how the laser
pulse can be in one of three positions within the pixel. Fig. C shows an example of
how edge smoothing is used.
This function only affects the received image for fax mode and for printer mode,
even if copy mode is also using binary picture processing.
2-20
10 August, 2001 LASER EXPOSURE
2.3 LASER EXPOSURE

2.3.1 OVERVIEW
[H]
[A]
Descriptions
[I]
Detailed
[C]
[D]
[B]
[F]
[E]
[G] B027D101.WMF
The optical path from the laser diode to the drum is shown above.
The LD unit [A] outputs a laser beam to the polygon mirror [B] through the
cylindrical lens [C]. The shield glass [D] prevents dust from reaching the polygon
mirror.
Each surface of the polygon mirror reflects one full main scan line. The laser beam
goes to the F-theta mirror [E], mirror [F], and BTL (barrel toroidal lens) [G]. Then
the laser beam goes to the drum through the toner shield glass [H].
The laser synchronizing detector [I] determines the main scan starting position.
The speed of the polygon mirror motor is 28,818.9 rpm for 600 dpi.
2-21
LASER EXPOSURE 10 August, 2001
2.3.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC)
LD LEVEL
LD ON +5V
LD OFF
PD LD
LD Driver
LD OFF LD
LD
Controller VIDEO
VIDEO
VREF Monitor
Reference
Circuit
LD Drive Board
B027D510.WMF
The LD driver IC drives the laser diode. To prevent the intensity of the laser beam
from changing because of the temperature, the machine monitors the current
passing through the laser diode (LD). The machine adjusts the current to the laser
diode by comparing it with the reference level from the reference circuit.
This auto power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during
printing while the laser diode is active.
The laser diode power is adjusted on the production line.
NOTE: Do not touch the variable resistors on the LD unit in the field.
2-22
10 August, 2001 LASER EXPOSURE
2.3.3 LD SAFETY SWITCH
Front Cover Safety and

Right Cover Switches
LDD:
Descriptions
+5VLD +5VLD LD Drive Board
Detailed
LD
SBCU
VCC PD
Laser
+5V
IPU Beam
Optical Path
PSU
OPC
LD Driver IC
Drum
B027D500.WMF
To ensure technician and user safety and to prevent the laser beam from
inadvertently switching on during servicing, safety switches are located at the front
and right covers. The switches are installed on the +5VLD line coming from the
power supply unit through the SBCU and IPU boards.
When the front cover or the right cover is opened, the power supply to the laser
diode is interrupted.
2-23
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) 10 August, 2001
2.4 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

2.4.1 OVERVIEW
1 2
3
10
4
7
B022D251.WMF
6
The PCU consists of the components shown in the above illustration. An organic
photoconductor (OPC) drum (diameter: 30 mm) is used in this machine.
1. Cleaning Blade 6. Development Roller

2. Toner Collection Coil 7. Development Unit
3. Pick-off Pawl 8. Charge Roller
4. OPC Drum 9. Charge Roller Cleaning Roller
5. ID Sensor (see note) 10. Quenching Lamp (see note)
NOTE: These parts are not included in the PCU.

The machine informs the user when the PCU life has finished. However, the user
can continue to make copies.
SP5-912 can be used to enable or disable this warning message, and to change
the default replacement interval (the default is 60k).
2-24
10 August, 2001 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
2.4.2 DRIVE
[A]
[E]
Descriptions
Detailed
[B]
[C]
[D]
B027D202.WMF
The main motor [A] drives the drum [B] through a series of gears, a timing belt [C],
and the drum drive shaft [D]. The main motor assembly includes a drive controller,
which outputs a motor lock signal when the rotation speed is out of the specified
range.
The fly-wheel [E] on the end of the drum drive shaft stabilizes the rotation speed
(this prevents banding and jitter from appearing on copies).
2-25
2.4.3 NEW PCU DETECTION

[A]
B027D206.WMF [B] [C]
The new PCU detect switch [A] detects when a new PCU is installed. Each PCU
has an actuator [B]. When a new PCU is installed in the machine, the actuator [B]
pushes the new PCU detect switch. The actuator is a sector gear, and this gear
engages with the drum gear [C]. When the drum rotates, the actuator is released
from the drum gear. The actuator drops away from the new PCU detect switch and
remains in this "down" position for the duration of the PCU's life.
The machine recognizes when a new PCU has been installed in the machine
because the actuator of the new PCU contacts the new PCU detect switch. After
the front cover and right cover are closed, the machine then performs the TD
sensor initial setting procedure automatically (for about 45 seconds). During this
time, the drum rotates and the actuator drops away from the sensor.
Also, while the machine performs the TD sensor initial setting, the machine makes
a ID sensor pattern on the drum. This checks whether the developer has fallen into
the development unit (in other words, it checks whether the technician remembered
to remove the developer seal from the PCU at machine installation). If the machine
does not detect the ID sensor pattern, SC 392 will be generated.
2-26
10 August, 2001 DRUM CHARGE
2.5 DRUM CHARGE

2.5.1 OVERVIEW
[D] [C]
Descriptions
Detailed
[A]
[B]
B027D203.WMF
This copier uses a drum charge roller to charge the drum. The drum charge roller
[A] always contacts the surface of the drum [B] to give it a negative charge of –
900V.
The high voltage supply board gives a negative dc voltage to the drum charge
roller through the spring [C] and terminal plate [D].
2-27
DRUM CHARGE 10 August, 2001
2.5.1 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION

Correction for Environmental Conditions
[A] 28.9 cm
+
2 cm
[B]
ID Sensor Pattern 2 cm
Sub Scan Direction
-1700 V
Charge Voltage
-1500 V
On
Laser Diode
Off
Drum Potential -950 V
-750 V
Development Bias -650 V
-400 V
-150 V
ID Sensor Output V sg (4.00 V)
V sdp (3.70 V)
V sp (0.40 V)
B027D508.WMF
With a drum charge roller system, the voltage transferred from roller to drum varies
with the temperature and humidity around the drum charge roller. The lower the
temperature or humidity is, the higher the applied voltage required.
To compensate, the machine uses the ID sensor to measure the effects of current
environmental conditions. For this measurement, the process control parameters
are balanced so that any small change in drum potential caused by environmental
effects is reflected in a change in the amount of toner transferred to the drum.
This measurement is made immediately after the ID sensor pattern for toner
density control. Immediately after making ID sensor pattern [A], the charge roller
voltage stays on, but the development bias goes up to -650V; as a result the drum
potential is reduced to -750V. The laser diode is not switched on, and the drum
potential is now slightly higher than the development bias, so only a very small
amount of toner transfers to the drum. The ID sensor measures the density of this
pattern [B], and the output voltage is known as Vsdp. This voltage is compared with
Vsg (read from the bare drum at the same time).
2-28
10 August, 2001 DRUM CHARGE
If the humidity drops, the drum potential goes up (to a higher –ve voltage) even if
the charge roller voltage supply stays the same (efficiency of voltage transfer is
higher with lower humidity). As a result, less toner is transferred to ID sensor
pattern [B]. If the sensor output reaches a certain point, the drum charge voltage
will be reduced.
To determine whether to change the drum charge roller voltage, the machine
Descriptions
compares Vsdp with Vsg.
Detailed
• Vsdp / Vsg > 0.95 = Reduce the magnitude of the drum charge voltage by 50 V
• Vsdp / Vsg < 0.90 = Increase the magnitude of the drum charge voltage by 50 V
2.5.2 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING

The ID sensor pattern is made in the following conditions:
• During warming up at power on
• If the machine starts warming up after a certain time (default: 30 minutes) has
passed since entering night mode or low power mode
The 30-minute interval can be changed using SP2995-1.
• At the end of a job, if an ID sensor pattern has not been made for a certain
number of sheets (default: 0 sheets = disabled)
The number of sheets can be changed using SP2995-2.
2-29
DRUM CHARGE 10 August, 2001
2.5.3 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING
[B]
[A]
B022D252.WMF
Because the drum charge roller [A] always contacts the drum, it gets dirty easily.
So, the charge roller cleaning roller [B] also contacts the drum charge roller all the
time to clean the surface of the drum charge roller.
2-30
10 August, 2001 DEVELOPMENT
2.6 DEVELOPMENT
2.6.1 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
Detailed
5
B027D301.WMF
3 2
The development unit consists of the following parts.

1. Development roller 4. Mixing auger 1
2. Mixing auger 2 5. Doctor blade
3. TD sensor
This machine uses a single-roller development system. Two mixing augers mix the
developer. The toner density (TD) sensor and image density (ID) sensor (see the
illustration in the PCU section) are used to control toner density.
2-31
DEVELOPMENT 10 August, 2001
2.6.2 DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B027D304.WMF
The main motor [A] drives the development roller [B] and mixing augers [C] through
a train of gears and the development drive shaft [D]. When the PCU is pushed in,
the development drive shaft engages the development roller gear.
The development drive gears (except for the gears in the development unit) are
helical gears. These gears are quieter than normal gears.
2-32
2.6.3 DEVELOPER MIXING
[D]
[C]
Descriptions
Detailed
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B]
B027D302.WMF
This copier uses 2 mixing augers, [A] and [B], to keep the developer evenly mixed.
Mixing auger 2 [A] transports excess developer, scraped off the development roller
[C] by the doctor blade [D], towards the front of the machine. Mixing auger 1 [B]
returns the excess developer, along with new toner, to the rear of the mixing
assembly. Here the developer is reapplied to the development roller.
2-33
2.6.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS
[B]
[A]
B027D303.WMF
This machine uses a negative-positive development system, in which black areas

of the latent image are at a low negative charge (about –150 ± 50 V) and white
areas are at a high negative charge (about -950 V).
To attract negatively charged toner to the black areas of the latent image on the
drum, the high voltage supply board applies a bias of -650 volts to the development
rollers throughout the image development process. The bias is applied to the
development roller shaft [A] through the drive shaft [B].
The development bias voltage (-650 V) can be adjusted with SP2-201-1.
2-34
2.6.5 TONER SUPPLY

Toner bottle replenishment mechanism
[G] [F]
Descriptions
Detailed
[H]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[A] B027D557.WMF
[B]
When a toner bottle is placed in the bottle holder unit [A] and the unit is pushed in
completely, pin [B] moves against the side [C] of the PCU, and the toner shutter [D]
is pulled out to open the bottle. When the toner bottle holder lever [E] is put back in
the original position, the cap [F] on the toner bottle is pulled away and kept in place
by the chuck [G].
The toner supply mechanism transports toner from the bottle to the development
unit. The toner bottle has a spiral groove [H] that helps move toner to the
development unit.
When the bottle holder unit is pulled out to add a new toner bottle, the following
happens automatically to prevent toner from scattering.
• The chuck releases the toner bottle cap into its proper position.
• The toner shutter shuts to block the opening as a result of pressure from a
spring.
2-35
Toner supply mechanism
[A]
[B]
[C]
B027D558.WMF
[D]
[E] B027D306.WMF
The toner supply motor [A] drives the toner bottle [B] and the mylar blades [C].
First, the toner falls down into the toner bottle holder. The toner supply mylar
blades transfer the toner to the slit [D]. When the PCU is installed in the machine,
the shutter [E] above the PCU is opened by the machine frame. Then the toner
falls down into the development unit through the slit and the shutter.
2-36
2.6.6 TONER DENSITY CONTROL

Overview
There are four modes for controlling toner supply as shown in the following tables.
The mode can be changed with by SP2-921. The factory setting is sensor control 1
mode.
Descriptions
Basically, toner density is controlled using the standard TD sensor voltage (Vts),
Detailed
toner supply reference voltage (Vref), actual TD sensor output voltage (Vt), and ID
sensor output data (Vsp/Vsg).
Toner Supply Clutch On Time

Calculation
TD Sensor Output
(Vt)
Vt Reference
Voltage (Vref)
New Vref
Vt Reference
Voltage Update
Vref Update
ID Sensor Output
(Vsp/Vsg)
TD Sensor Initial
Setting (Vts)
B027D517.WMF
2-37
There are four toner density control modes as follows.
Mode Sensor control 1 (SP2-921, “0”): Normally use this setting only
Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage (Vts or Vref)
Toner control process Toner is supplied to the development unit when Vt is higher
than the reference voltage (Vts or Vref). This mode keeps the
Vref value for use the next toner density control.
Vts is used for the first toner density control after a new PCU
has been installed, until it has been corrected with the ID
sensor output.
Vref is used after Vts has been corrected with the ID sensor
output voltage (corrected during the first toner density control
for a new PCU).
Toner supply amount Varies
Toner end detection Performed
Sensor control 2 (SP2-921, “1”): For designer’s use only; do

Mode
not use in the field
Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage (Vts)
Toner control process This toner control process is the same as sensor control 1
mode. However, the reference voltage used is always Vts.
Toner supply amount Varies
Fixed control 1 (SP2-921, “2”): For designer’s use only; do not

Mode
use in the field
Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage (Vts or Vref)
Toner control process This toner control process is the same as sensor control 1
mode.
Toner supply amount Fixed (SP2-925)
Fixed control 2 (SP2-921, “3”): Use temporarily if the TD

Mode
sensor needs to be replaced
Toner supply decision None
Toner control process Toner is supplied every printed page regardless of Vt.
Toner supply amount Fixed (SP2-925)
Toner end detection Not performed
2-38
Toner density sensor initial setting

The TD sensor initial setting procedure is performed automatically when the new
PCU is installed in the machine. During TD sensor initial setting, the TD sensor is
set so that the TD sensor output to the value of SP2-926 (default: 2.5V). This value
will be used as the standard reference voltage (Vts) of the TD sensor.
Descriptions
Detailed
Toner density measurement
Toner density in the developer is detected once every copy cycle. The sensor
output voltage (Vt) during the detection cycle is compared with the standard
reference voltage (Vts) or the toner supply reference voltage (Vref).
Vsp/Vsg detection
The ID sensor detects the following voltages.
• Vsg: The ID sensor output when checking the drum surface
• Vsp: The ID sensor output when checking the ID sensor pattern
• At the end of a job, if an ID sensor pattern has not been made for a certain
number of sheets (default: 0 sheets = disabled)
The number of sheets can be changed using SP2-995-2.
In this way, the reflectivity of both the drum surface and the pattern on the drum are
checked. This compensates for any variations in the reflectivity of the pattern on
the drum or the reflectivity of the drum surface.
The ID sensor pattern is made on the drum by charge roller and laser diode.
Vsp/Vsg is not detected every page or job; it is detected at the following times to
decide Vref.
• During warming up at power on
• If the machine starts warming up after a certain time (default: 30 minutes)
has passed since entering night mode or low power mode
The 30-minute interval can be changed using SP2-995.
Toner supply reference voltage (Vref) determination

The toner supply reference voltage (Vref) is the threshold voltage for the toner
supply determination. Vref is determined using the following data:
• ID sensor output (Vsp/Vsg)
• (Vts or the current Vref) - Vt
Toner supply determination

The reference voltage (Vts or Vref) is the threshold voltage for determining whether
or not to supply toner. If Vt becomes greater than the reference voltage, the
machine supplies additional toner.
2-39
Toner Supply Motor On Time Determinations

For fixed control mode, the toner supply motor on time is specified by the setting of
SP2-925, and does not vary. The default setting is 200 ms for each copy. The
toner supply motor on time for each value of SP2-925 is as follows.
Value of SP2-925 Motor On Time (t = 200 ms)

0 t
1 2t
2 4t
3 8t
4 12t
5 16t
6 Continuously
7 Not supplied
For sensor control modes 1 and 2, the toner supply motor on time is decided by the
following factors.
• ∆Vt (= Vt – (Vref or Vts))
• TD sensor sensitivity (coefficient: S, value is 0.3)
There are seven levels for toner supply motor on time as shown below.
Level Decision Motor On Time (seconds)

1 0 < ∆Vt ≤ S/16 t (0.6)
2 S/16 < ∆Vt ≤ S/8 t x 2 (1.2)
3 S/8 < ∆Vt ≤ S/4 t x 4 (2.4)
4 S/4 < ∆Vt ≤ S/2 t x 8 (4.8)
5 S/2 < ∆Vt ≤ 4S/5 t x 16 (9.6)
6 4S/5 < ∆Vt ≤ S (near-end) T (30); see note 3
7 S < ∆Vt (toner end) T (30); see note 3
NOTE: 1) The value of “t” can be changed using SP2-922 (default: 0.6 second)
2) The value of “T” can be changed using SP2-923 (default: 30 seconds)
3) T (30) means that toner is supplied intermittently in a half duty cycle
(1.5 s on, 1.5 s off) for 30 seconds
2-40
2.6.7 TONER SUPPLY IN ABNORMAL SENSOR CONDITIONS

ID sensor
Readings are abnormal if any of the following conditions occur:
• Vsg ≤ 2.5V
• Vsg < 3.5V when maximum power (254) is applied
Descriptions
• Vsp ≥ 2.5V
Detailed
• (Vsg – Vsp) < 1.0V
• ID sensor power required to make the standard output reaches the maximum
value (254)
The above ID sensor values can be checked using SP2-220.
When this is detected, the machine changes the value of Vref to the previous value
then does the toner density control process (in a similar way to sensor control
mode 2).
No SC code is generated if the ID sensor is defective.
TD Sensor
The TD sensor is checked every copy. If the readings from TD sensor become
abnormal, the machine changes the toner density control mode to fixed supply
mode 2, and the toner supply amount per page is always 200 ms, regardless of the
value of SP2-925. Then at the end of a job (if the optional fax unit is installed), or
100 copies after the TD sensor error was detected (if no fax unit is installed), an SC
code is generated (SC390) and the machine must be repaired. The 100-copy
threshold can be adjusted with SP 2-992.
2.6.8 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION AND RECOVERY

The toner near end and end conditions are detected using the Vt and Vref values,
in a similar way to toner density control.
This is done in all toner supply modes except for fixed mode 2, when toner end is
not detected.
Toner Near End Detection

If Vt is at level 6 (see the table on the previous page) five times consecutively, the
machine enters the toner near end condition and the toner end indicator starts
blinking. Then the machine supplies toner for a certain time, which depends on the
setting of SP 2-923 (see the previous page).
2-41
Toner Near End Recovery

If the machine detects “S/2 < ∆Vt ≤ 4S/5” twice consecutively when in one of the
following situations, the machine leaves the toner near end condition.
• While in the toner recovery cycle (supplying toner on and off for 30 s – see
the previous page) after the machine has detected a toner near end
condition.
• During copying in the toner near end condition.
• If the front cover is opened and closed for more than 10 seconds while a
toner near end condition exists.
Toner End Detection

There are two situations for entering the toner end condition.
• When Vt is level 7 three times consecutively, the machine enters the toner
end condition.
• When “4S/5 < ∆Vt ≤ S” is detected in the toner near end condition, then 50
copies can be made after this condition (the number of copies between this
condition and toner end can be changed using SP2-213).
Toner End Recovery

If the front cover is opened and closed for 10 seconds while a toner end condition
exists and the toner bottle is replaced, the machine attempts to recover using the
same procedure as for toner near end/end detection.
2-42
10 August, 2001 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING
2.7 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING

2.7.1 DRUM CLEANING
[A] [B]
Descriptions
Detailed
B022D251.WMF
The cleaning blade [A] removes any toner remaining on the drum after the image is
transferred to the paper. This model uses a counter blade system.
The cleaning blade scrapes off toner remaining on the drum. When toner builds up
in the cleaning unit, toner at the top of the pile is removed by the toner collection
coil [B].
To remove the toner and other particles that are accumulated at the edge of the
cleaning blade, the drum turns in reverse for about 5 mm at the end of every copy
job. This feature is controlled with SP 2-998.
In addition, cleaning is done in the middle of a job if 100 sheets have been made
since the previous cleaning. This feature is controlled with SP 2-211.
2-43
DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING 10 August, 2001
2.7.2 TONER RECYCLING
[A]
[A]
B027D205.WMF
[B]
[B]
B027D306.WMF
[C]
Toner picked up by the toner collection coil [A], is transported to the opening [B] in
the side of the PCU. Then, this toner falls into the development unit with new toner
coming from the toner bottle and it is all mixed together by mixing auger 1 [C] and
used again.
2-44
10 August, 2001 PAPER FEED
2.8 PAPER FEED

2.8.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3 4 5
Descriptions
Detailed
6
B027D501.WMF
12 11 10
There are two paper trays, each of which can hold 500 sheets.
The paper tray feed stations use a friction pad system.
The two relay sensors are used for paper jam detection.
The components of the paper feed station are as follows.
1. Paper Lift Sensor 7. Upper Relay Sensor

2. Paper Height –1 Sensor 8. Upper Relay Roller
3. Paper Height –2 Sensor 9. Lower Relay Roller
4. Paper End Sensor 10. Lower Relay Sensor
5. Paper Feed Roller 11. Friction Pad
6. Paper Size Sensor 12. Tray Heater (Option)
2-45
PAPER FEED 10 August, 2001
2.8.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B027D702.WMF
The main motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanism of both the first and
second paper trays. The paper feed clutches [B] transfer drive from this motor to
the paper feed rollers [C].
When the paper feed clutch turns on, the feed rollers start to feed the paper. The
paper feed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor [D] has been
activated.
2-46
2.8.3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM
Descriptions
[A] [B]
Detailed
[C]
B027D104.WMF
The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray to the
copier. The friction pad [B] allows only one sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad
applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring [C].
The friction pad pressure cannot be adjusted.
2-47
2.8.4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[K] [G] [F]

[H]
B027D521.WMF [A]
[E]
[B]
[I]
[J]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B027D522.WMF
The paper size switch detects when the tray is pushed in.
When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, the pin [A] for the lift motor
pressure shaft engages the lift motor coupling [B] and the pin [C] for the bottom
plate lift shaft in the tray engages the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D]. The
pin [E] on the rear of the tray pushes the lock lever so that the lift motor can lift the
bottom plate pressure lever.
The lift motor turns on, and turns clockwise as shown in the diagram. The main
pressure spring [K] pulls the bottom plate pressure lever, and this lifts the tray
bottom plate.
When the top of the stack touches the feed roller, the motor cannot pull up the
plate any more, so it pulls the actuator [G] into the lift sensor [F]. Then the lift motor
stops. The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high, so the lift motor
reverses a certain time (200 ms or 600 ms), depending on the paper size, to
reduce this pressure. For smaller paper, it reverses the larger amount (600 ms) to
reduce the pressure more.
NOTE: The relationship between the bottom plate pressure adjustment, paper size
thresholds, and the related SP modes is explained in “Bottom Plate
Pressure Adjustment for Paper Size”.
2-48
For A4-width paper or wider, a projection [H] on the side fence engages the
secondary pressure spring [J] through a lever [I]. Then, the secondary pressure
spring [J] applies paper feed pressure in addition to the main pressure spring [K], to
ensure that extra pressure is applied to wider paper.
When the paper tray is pulled out, the pins [A, C] disengage from the couplings [B,
D], and the bottom plate drops. To make it easier to push the tray in, the lift motor
Descriptions
rotates backwards 1.7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling
Detailed
[D] to the original position. The amount of reverse can be adjusted with SP 1-912.
2.8.5 PAPER END DETECTION
[A]
[B]
[C]
B027D520.WMF
If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler
[A] and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout
[C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.
When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper
end feeler causes it to lift up.
2-49
2.8.6 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
[B]
[A]
[C]
[C]
B027D522.WMF
The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of on/off signals
from two paper height sensors [A] and [B]. The paper amount is displayed on the
LCD.
When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves
the actuator up.
The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier.
Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2

Near End OFF ON
30% ON ON
70% ON OFF
100% OFF OFF
When the tray contains paper of a small width, the paper feed pressure may
become too low when the thickness of the remaining stack of paper has
decreased. The lift motor rotates forward 400 ms after the sensor detects a certain
amount of paper remaining in the tray to increase paper feed pressure, simulating
the pressure generated by a full tray.
NOTE: The relationship between the bottom plate re-adjustment timing, paper size
threshold, and the related SP modes is explained in “Bottom Plate
Pressure Adjustment for Paper Size”.
2-50
2.8.7 FEED PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT FOR PAPER SIZE

Overview
For the friction pad system, the pressure from the top of the stack against the feed
rolleris very important for paper feed quality from the paper tray. If the pressure is
high, double feed may occur. On the other hand, if the pressure is low, non-feed
may occur. Because of this, the pressure must be varied depending on the paper
Descriptions
Detailed
size, paper weight, and amount of paper remaining in the tray. To achieve this, the
pressure for each paper tray can be adjusted using SP mode.
Paper Size Thresholds

The upward pressure from the bottom plate spring is always the same. However,
downward pressure from the stack on the bottom plate depends on the paper size.
Because of this, for a smaller paper size, the pressure of the top of the stack
against the feed roller is more than normal (because of the smaller downward
pressure from the stack), so adjustment may be necessary.
Using the following SP modes, either two or three paper size ranges can be
specified. Using other SP modes (explained later), the pressure can be adjusted
separately for each of these ranges to deal with any feed problems that have been
occurring.
Normal Small Size Middle Size

Paper Size Greater than HLT/A5 HLT/A5 or smaller None
(default setting) (default setting) (default setting)
1st paper tray --- SP1908-8 SP1908-9
2nd paper tray --- SP1909-8 SP1909-9
3rd paper tray --- SP1910-8 SP1910-9
4th paper tray --- SP1911-8 SP1911-9
Paper Size Ranges

For Three Size Ranges
Small paper size range: Paper sizes equal to the ‘Small’ SP mode value, or
smaller.
Middle paper size range: Paper sizes greater than the small paper size, up to and
including the middle paper size specified by the ‘Middle’ SP mode.
Normal paper size range: Paper sizes greater than the ‘Middle’ SP mode.
For Two Size Ranges
Small paper size range: Paper sizes equal to the ‘Small’ SP mode value, or
smaller.
Normal paper size range: Paper sizes greater than the ‘Small’ SP mode.
2-51
Feed Pressure Adjustment

The pressure can be adjusted to solve a paper feed problem. This adjusts the
amount of lift motor reverse just after the lift sensor is activated when lifting the
stack to the paper feed position. To apply less pressure to the top of the stack, the
amount of reverse should be increased.
Effect of the Amount of Remaining Paper
Feed Pressure A5 size

A4 size
A3 size
Paper
0 50 sheets Amount
25 % 75 % 500 sheets
(Near-end)
3
B027D518.WMF
From tray full to paper near-end

The pressure between the top of the stack and the fed roller also depends on the
amount of remaining paper, especially for small paper sizes, as shown in the above
graph. The pressure for A5 changes significantly between stack heights of 500
sheets and 50 sheets, but not much for A4 or A3 paper.
For 500 sheets of A5, the pressure is too high. To counter this, the lift motor
reverses 600 ms (! in the graph), as explained in the previous section. The SP
modes in the following table are for solving feed problems that occur when the tray
is between full and near-end.
Normal Small Size Middle Size
Paper Size Greater than HLT/A5 HLT/A5 or smaller None
(default setting) (default setting) (default setting)
1st paper tray SP1908-1 SP1908-2 SP1908-3
2nd paper tray SP1909-1 SP1909-2 SP1909-3
3rd paper tray SP1910-1 SP1910-2 SP1910-3
4th paper tray SP1911-1 SP1911-2 SP1911-3
Default (all trays) 200 ms 600 ms 200 ms
(default: not used)
2-52
From paper near end to paper end

When paper is used up, the pressure on the bottom plate reduces, so the upward
pressure increases, causing the pressure of the feed roller against the top of the
stack to increase.
However, for small paper sizes, because of the previous correction (600 ms
reverse rotation of the lift motor), the pressure between the feed roller and the top
Descriptions
of the stack becomes too small at some point as paper is used up, and this could
Detailed
cause paper feed problems. This condition is more significant for smaller paper
sizes, such as A5, as shown in the diagram.
If a paper feed problem occurs when the stack is partly used up, the pressure can
be re-adjusted (" in the graph) using the following SP modes. The default is set for
50 sheets (at the near-end point)
The lift motor rotates forward for the time specified by the SP mode to increase the
pressure.
Small Size Middle Size

Paper Size HLT/A5 or smaller None
(default setting) (default setting)
1st paper tray SP1908-4 SP1908-5
2nd paper tray SP1909-4 SP1909-5
3rd paper tray SP1910-4 SP1910-5
4th paper tray SP1911-4 SP1911-5
Default (all trays) 400 ms 300 ms
(default: not used)
Also, the point at which this adjustment is applied (near-end [50 sheets], 25% full,
75% full) can be selected (# in the graph) using the following SP modes.
Small Size Middle Size

Paper Size HLT/A5 or smaller None
(default setting) (default setting)
1st paper tray SP1908-6 SP1908-7
2nd paper tray SP1909-6 SP1909-7
3rd paper tray SP1910-6 SP1910-7
4th paper tray SP1911-6 SP1911-7
Default (all trays) Near-end Near-end
(default: not used)
2-53
2.8.8 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
SW
[B]
1 2 3 4
Size
A3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
A4 Sideways # # ❍ #
A4 Lengthwise # # ❍ ❍
A5 Lengthwise,
❍ ❍ # #
81/2" x 14"
B4, 11" x 17" # ❍ # ❍ [A]
B5 Sideways,
# ❍ ❍ ❍
11" x 81/2"
B5 Lengthwise,
❍ # # #
81/2" x 11"
* (Asterisk) ❍ # ❍ #
#: ON (Not pushed)
❍: OFF (Pushed)
B027D523.WMF
There are four paper size microswitches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray
unit. The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size
indicator plate, which is on the front right of the tray.
Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To
determine which size has been installed, the CPU reads which microswitches the
actuator has switched off.
The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If
the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper
indicator will light.
When the paper size actuator is at the “*” mark, the paper tray can be set up to
accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using user tools. If the paper
size for this position is changed without changing the user tool setting, a paper jam
will result.
2-54
2.8.9 SPECIAL PAPER SETTING

Only the 2nd tray can feed special paper such as thick paper or envelopes. The
special paper type can be selected either by using the UP mode or with the
following operation.
• Select the 2nd tray then press the ! key.
Descriptions
Detailed
B027D590.WMF
After selecting the special paper type, the fusing temperature and transfer roller
current will be changed as follows.
1. Fusing temperature (when thick paper is selected):
Current operation temperature + 15 °C
2. Transfer roller current:
A3 width (11”): 14 µA
B4 width (10”): 15 µA
A4 width (8.5”): 17 µA
A5 width (5.5”): 20 µA
Note that for the by-pass tray, the fusing and transfer conditions for special paper
are also applied if the user uses thick (non-standard) mode.
2-55
2.8.10 SIDE AND END FENCES
[A]
[D]
[B]
B027D110.WMF
[C]
B027D109.WMF
Side Fences
If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or
bend. This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be
incorrect. To correct this, each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each
side fence can be secured with a screw [B], for customers who do not want to
change the paper size.
End Fence
As the amount of paper in the tray decreases, the bottom plate [C] lifts up
gradually. The end fence [D] is connected to the bottom plate. When the tray
bottom plate rises, the end fence moves forward and pushes the back of the paper
stack to keep it squared up.
2-56
2.8.11 PAPER REGISTRATION
[A]
Descriptions
[B]
Detailed
[C]
[D]
B027D702.WMF
B022D704.WMF
The drive from the main motor [A] is transmitted to the registration roller through
the registration clutch gear [B].
The registration sensor [C] is used for correcting paper skew and for detecting
paper misfeeds.
The cleaning mylar [D] contacts the registration roller. It removes paper dust from
the registration roller so that this dust will not transfer into the development unit
through the drum cleaning unit.
The amount of paper buckle at the registration roller to correct skew can be
adjusted with SP 1003.
If jams frequently occur after registration, the paper feed clutch can be re-
energized so that the feed roller can assist the registration roller to re-start paper
feed. This may be needed when feeding thicker paper. This adjustment is made
with SP 1903; it can be adjusted separately for tray 1 and the by-pass feeder, so
place the problem paper type in one of these and adjust SP 1-903 for that tray
only.
2-57
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION 10 August, 2001
2.9 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

2.9.1 OVERVIEW
[C]
[B] [C]
[A]
B027D403.WMF
[A]
B027D401.WMF
[D]
B027D402.WMF
The machine uses a transfer roller [A], which touches the surface of the drum [B].
The high voltage supply board supplies a positive current to the transfer roller,
which attracts the toner from the drum onto the paper. The current depends on the
paper width, paper type, and paper feed tray.
The curvature of the drum and the discharge plate [C] help the paper to separate
from the drum. The high voltage supply board also supplies a negative dc voltage
to the discharge plate.
Drive from the drum through a gear [D] turns the transfer roller
2-58
10 August, 2001 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
2.9.2 IMAGE TRANSFER CURRENT TIMING

There are two transfer current levels: low transfer current level and high transfer
current level. The image transfer procedure is as follows:
1. When the CPU receives the image writing start signal, the CPU instructs the
high voltage supply board to supply +10µA (low transfer current level) to the
Descriptions
roller. This prevents any positively charged toner on the drum surface from
Detailed
transferring to the transfer roller.
2. At a certain time after the low transfer current has been supplied to the roller,
an appropriate current is applied to the roller to transfer the toner to the paper.
3. After the trailing edge of the paper has passed through the roller, transfer
current turns off. In multiple copy mode, the transfer current shifts again to the
low transfer current.
The transfer current (high transfer current level) depends on the paper feed station,
paper width, and the temperature in the machine.
Example: Temperature = 15°C ~ 24°C
By-pass Tray
Paper Tray /
(Thick) / 2nd
Paper Width By-pass Tray Duplex (2nd Side)
Paper Tray
(Normal)
(Special Paper)
A3/11” x 17”,
14 µA 10 µA 14 µA
A4/81/2 x 11”sideways
B4 13 µA 12 µA 15 µA
A4/11” x 81/2 lengthwise,
13 µA 16 µA 17 µA
A5/51/2 x 81/2 sidewise
A5/81/2 x 51/2 lengthwise
16 µA 16 µA 20 µA
and less
The transfer current can be adjusted using SP2301, except for the low transfer
current.
Be careful when increasing the transfer current. This might cause a ghosting effect,
in which part of the image at the top of the page is repeated lower down the page
at a lower density. It may also damage the OPC drum in the worst case.
2-59
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION 10 August, 2001
2.9.3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING

If the paper size is smaller than the image, or if a paper jam occurs during printing,
toner may be transferred to the roller surface. To prevent the toner from
transferring to the back side of the printouts, the transfer roller requires cleaning
before the next printing run.
During transfer roller cleaning, the high voltage supply unit supplies a negative
cleaning current (-4 µA) to the transfer roller. Any negatively charged toner on the
transfer roller is then transferred back to the drum. Then a positive cleaning current
(+10 µA) is applied to the transfer roller to push back to the drum any positively
charged toner on the transfer roller.
The machine goes through the cleaning mode in the following conditions:
• Before starting the printing job (only if enabled with SP2-996; note that the
default setting is off)
• Just after the power is switched on.
• After a copy jam has been cleared
The transfer roller cleaning function is done.
Also, the transfer roller cleaning current can be adjusted using SP2-301-4.
2.9.4 PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM
[A]
B027D403.WMF
B027D401.WMF
The discharge plate [A] and the drum curvature of the drum help the paper to
separate away from the drum. The high voltage supply board applies a constant dc
voltage, -1.8 kV (when feeding from a paper tray) or –2.1 kV (from the duplex unit)
to the discharge plate.
The discharge plate voltage can be adjusted using SP2-901.
2-60
10 August, 2001 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
2.10 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.10.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3
Descriptions
11
Detailed
4
10
9 5
8 B022D551.WMF
7
The fusing unit and paper exit area consist of the following parts.
1. Paper exit roller 7. Two fusing lamps
2. Fusing exit sensor 8. Two thermistors
3. Hot roller strippers 9. Four thermostats
4. Pressure spring 10. Hot roller
5. Pressure roller 11. Paper overflow sensor
6. Cleaning roller
2-61
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 10 August, 2001
2.10.2 FUSING DRIVE AND RELEASE MECHANISM

[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
B027D504.WMF
[F] [E]
B022D553.WMF
The main motor [A] drives the fusing unit through a gear train and drives the paper
exit rollers [B] through a timing belt [C].
The fusing unit release mechanism automatically disengages the fusing unit drive
gear [D] when the right cover [E] is opened. This allows the fusing unit drive gear to
rotate freely so that misfed paper can easily be removed.
Also, the fusing drive is released by the fusing drive release solenoid [F]. To reduce
the warming up time, the machine cuts the drive to the fusing unit during warming
up. Just after the main switch is turned on, this solenoid is energized and the fusing
unit drive gear [D] is disengaged.
However, the fusing unit drive is not released when the temperature is lower than
15°C.
2-62
2.10.3 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM
Descriptions
Detailed
[C]
[A]
[B]
B027D566.WMF
The entrance guide [A] is adjustable for paper thickness to prevent creasing. The
left screw holes [B] on each side are used as the default setting.
If creasing occurs frequently in the fusing unit, adjust the entrance guide to the
right, by securing it with the other holes [C]. This allows more direct access to the
gap between the hot roller and the pressure roller.
2-63
2.10.4 PRESSURE ROLLER

[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
B027D562.WMF
The pressure springs [A] constantly apply pressure between the hot roller [B] and
the pressure roller [C].
Applied pressure can be changed by adjusting the position of the pressure springs.
The spring is positioned at the top [D] as the default setting.
The user moves lever [E] when using thicker copy paper or envelopes, to reduce
the pressure between the hot and pressure rollers.
2.10.5 CLEANING MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
B022D552.WMF
The cleaning roller [A] is always in contact with the pressure roller [B]. It collects
toner and paper dust adhered to the surface of the pressure roller.
2-64
2.10.6 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL
200 °C
Main A
Descriptions
175 °C
Detailed
165 °C 165 °C
160 °C
Sub B E
100 °C
Power Re-load ~ 3 pages C ~ 20 pages

On or
~ 60 s D
B027D502.WMF
Temperature Control
Just after the main power switch is turned on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp to
obtain a fusing temperature of 175°C (Main fusing lamp), 165°C (Sub fusing lamp)
for the first 60s, or for the first three consecutive pages of printing, whichever
comes first. After that, the machine keeps the fusing temperature at 175°C for the
first 20 consecutive pages of printing. Then the fusing temperature is kept at
165°C.
The three-page and 60-second limits can be adjusted with SP1-105-8 and -9.
Note that the fusing temperature is higher if the user uses special paper in the 2nd
tray or thick paper mode from the bypass tray (☛ 2.8.9).
2-65
Fusing Lamp Control

Turning on and off the fusing lamp power causes fluorescent light in the room to
flicker. To reduce the flickering, use the following SP modes.
Fusing temperature detection cycle (SP mode 1-108)
The CPU checks the output from the fusing thermistor once a second (default
setting). The CPU compares the current and previous temperatures. Based on the
result, it then decides how long the fusing lamp power should be on during the next
one-second interval (also, if the current temperature is too high, the power will not
be needed).
Starting and stopping the fusing lamp power every second causes fluorescent
lighting in the room to flicker. To reduce this flickering, use SP1-108 to change the
cycle from 1 second to 3 seconds.
Fusing soft-start
In addition, whenever the fusing lamp power switches on, full power is applied to
the fusing lamp gradually, not all at once. This prevents the power in the room from
dropping suddenly. This feature is known as “Soft Start”. The machine does this by
gradually allowing more power to the fusing lamp over a number of zero-cross
cycles of the ac supply. The diagram below shows full power being applied
gradually over the duration of 3 zero-cross cycles. Soft start occurs every time the
fusing lamp power switches on (i.e., at some time during every second), not just at
the start of the print job.
NOTE: This feature is effective to counter flickering lights. However, generated
noise increases if the setting is changed from the default. If a radio or a TV
is close by the machine, the noise may have some effect on the image or
sound.
B027D512.WMF
2-66
2.10.7 OVERHEAT PROTECTION

If the hot roller temperature becomes higher than 231°C, the CPU cuts off the
power to the fusing lamp. At the same time, SC543 is generated.
Even if the thermistor overheat protection fails, there are four thermostats in series
with the common ground line of the fusing lamp. If the temperature of the
Descriptions
thermostat reaches 210°C, one of the thermostats opens, removing power from the
Detailed
fusing lamp. At the same time, SC 542 is generated and the machine stops
operating.
2.10.8 PAPER EXIT
[A]
B027D601.WMF
The paper overflow detection sensor [A] is located at the paper exit section of the
fusing unit. When this sensor is activated, the machine detects that the paper stack
height exceeded a certain limit and stops printing.
2-67
ENERGY SAVER MODES 10 August, 2001
2.11 ENERGY SAVER MODES

2.11.1 OVERVIEW
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s)
Stand-by Mode
Energy Saver Key On

-or-
Panel Off Timer Energy Saver Key On
(10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s) Return Time Less than 3 s
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s) Energy Saver Mode
(Low Power Mode)
Operation Sw. On
Platen Cover Open/Close
Auto Off Mode Original Set ADF
Return Time Less Than

10 s
Off Mode
FAX: RX, etc.

Printer Data in After Printing
Off Stand-by
Mode
B027D503.WMF
When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
This machine has two types of energy saver mode as follows.
1) Energy saver mode
2) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes.
• Panel off timer (energy saver mode timer) : User Tools – System Settings –
Timer Setting – Panel Off Timer
• Auto off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Auto Off
Timer
• Auto off disabling (SP mode): Set SP 5-305 to 1. This allows the user to
disable auto off mode by setting the auto off timer to 0.
2-68
10 August, 2001 ENERGY SAVER MODES
2.11.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE

Entering the energy saver mode
The operation manual uses the term ‘panel off mode’ for the timer.
The machine enters energy saver mode when one of the following is done.
• The panel off timer runs out
Descriptions
• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for one second
Detailed
Note that the default setting of the panel off timer is 60 s, which is the same as the
auto off timer. In this condition, if the machine is not touched for 60 s, it will go
straight to auto off mode. If the user wants an energy saver mode and an auto off
mode, the panel off timer must be set to a shorter value than the auto off timer,
What happens in energy saver mode
When the machine enters energy saver mode, the fusing lamp drops to a certain
temperature, and the operation panel indicators are turned off except for the
Energy Saver LED and the Power LED.
If the CPU receives an image print out command from an application (e. g. to print
incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the fusing temperature rises to print
the data.
Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
• Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
• An original is placed in the ADF
• The ADF is lifted
• A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
The recovery time from energy saver mode is about 3 s.
Operation Energy
Mode Fusing Temp. +24V System +5V
Switch Saver LED
Energy o
On On 150 C On On
Saver
2-69
ENERGY SAVER MODES 10 August, 2001
2.11.3 AUTO OFF MODE

There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference
between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machine’s condition when it
enters Auto Off mode.
Entering off stand-by and off modes
The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off mode when one of the following
is done.
• The auto off timer runs out
• The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off
If one or more of the following conditions exists, the machine enters Off Stand-by
mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters Off Mode.
• Error or SC condition
• An optional G4 unit is installed
• Image data is stored in the memory
• During memory TX or polling RX
• The handset is off hook
• An original is in the ADF
• The ADF is open
Off Stand-by mode
The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a
ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is
activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes
the print job.
Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Returning to stand-by mode
The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The
recovery time is about 10 s.
Energy
Operation System
Mode Saver Fusing Lamp +24V Note
Switch +5V
Mode
Off
Off Stand-by Off Off On On
(On when printing)
+5VE is
Off Off Off Off Off Off
supplied
2-70
10 August, 2001 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.)
4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 30 m3/hr/person
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10 -6 oz/yd3)
6. Avoid an area which is exposed to sudden temperature changes. This includes:
1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
7. Do not place the machine in an area where it will be exposed to corrosive
gases.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea
level.
9. Place the copier on a strong and level base. (Inclination on any side should be
no more than 5 mm.)
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
3.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: With in 5 mm (0.2") of level
3-1
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 10 August, 2001
3.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the copier near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
C
A: In Front: Over 750 mm (29.6")
B: Left: Over 10 mm (4")
C: To Rear:Over 10 mm (4")
D: Right: Over 10 mm (4")
B D
B027I201.WMF
E
F
G
E: 620 mm (24.4")
F: 640 mm (25.2")
G: 550 mm (21.7")
H: 1137 mm (44.8")
B027I202.WMF
NOTE: The 750 mm recommended for the space at the front is only for pulling out
the paper tray. If an operator stands at the front of the copier, more space
is required.
3-2
10 August, 2001 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
!CAUTION
1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the copier and easily accessible.
Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
2. Avoid multi-wiring.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A

220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 7 A
110V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 13 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 %
3. Do not set anything on the power cord.
3-3
COPIER INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
3.2 COPIER INSTALLATION

3.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
!CAUTION
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
1. ADF 2. Bridge Unit or Shift Tray

1. Rating voltage output connector 1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V for accessory Max. DC24 V
B022I500.WMF
3. Duplex Unit 4. By-pass Tray

1. Rating voltage output connector 1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V for accessory Max. DC24 V
3-4
10 August, 2001 COPIER INSTALLATION
3.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.
Unpack the copier
Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit, LCT, or Finisher?
Yes No
Place the copier on the Paper Tray Unit or LCT
Install the Paper Tray Unit or LCT
Install the copier
Does the user require the Memory Unit?

Yes No
Install the Memory Unit
Does the user require the By-pass Tray?

Yes No
Install the By-pass Tray
Does the user require the Shift Tray?

Yes No
Install the Shift Tray
Does the user require the Finisher?

Yes No
Install the Bridge Unit
Install the Finisher
Does the user require the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit ?
Yes No
Install the Interchange Unit
Install the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit
Install the ARDF or Platen Cover (if required)
B022I513.WMF
3-5
3.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
No. Description Q’ty

1 Paper Tray Decal 1
2 Emblem 1
3 Model Name Decal 1
4 NECR 1
5 End Fence 1
6 HDD Caution Decal (-17, -57 only) 1
7 Operating Instructions – System Setting 1
8 Operating Instructions – Copy Reference 1
3-6
3.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
B022I101.WMF
[A]
B022I502.WMF
[B]
B022I501.WMF
!CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
If the optional paper tray or the optional LCT is going to be installed now, put the
copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install these options, then install
the copier.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused if the machine is moved to another location in the future.
1. Remove the tapes and the shipping retainer [A] on the exterior of the copier.
2. Install the end fence [B].
3-7
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B022I102.WMF [H]
[J]
[I]
[G]
[E]
[F] B022I504.WMF
3. Open the front cover [A].

4. Remove the red tag [B] and toner seal [C], then peel the sealing tape [D] off to
install the developer.
5. Raise the toner bottle holder lever [E], push lever [F] down, and pull the toner
bottle holder [G] out.
6. Shake the toner bottle [H] well.
NOTE: Do not remove the toner bottle cap [I] until after shaking.
7. Unscrew the bottle cap [I] and insert the bottle into the holder.
NOTE: Do not touch the inner bottle cap [J].
8. Reposition the holder and press down the holder lever to secure the bottle.
3-8
[A]
B022I103.WMF
[B]
B022I503.WMF
9. Attach the appropriate emblem [A] to the front cover if the emblem is not
attached to the front cover.
10. Pull the paper tray out and turn the paper size dial to select the appropriate
size. Adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size.
NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull out the tray fully, then push down the
green lock at the rear of the tray.
11. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [B] to the paper tray.
NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also used for the optional paper tray or
the optional LCT. Keep any remaining decals for use with these
optional units.
3-9
[A]
B022I105.WMF
[B]
B027I105.WMF
12. If the optional bridge unit will not be installed: Swing the sensor feeler [A]
out.
13. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen cover (see ARDF Installation or
Platen Cover Installation).
14. Plug in the machine and turn the main power switch on. The machine
automatically performs TD sensor initial setting (approximately 15 seconds).
15. Check the copy quality and copying functions.
16. Initialize the electrical total counter using SP7-825, depending on the service
contract type.
HDD Caution Decal (for only –17, -57 models)

1. When installing the optional HDD, attach the HDD caution decal [B] to the front
cover.
3-10
10 August, 2001 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
3.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.

1 Securing Bracket 2
2 Screw – M4x10 4
[A]
B390I603.WMF
[C]
[B]
B390I601.WMF
!CAUTION
1. Remove the strips of tape.

2. Set the copier [A] on the paper tray unit [B].
NOTE: When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the cable [C].
3-11
PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
[C]
[A]
[B] B390I604.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
B390I600.WMF
3. Remove the connector cover [A] (1 screw).

4. Connect the cable [B] to the copier, as shown.
5. Attach a securing bracket [C] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown (1
screw each).
6. Re-install the connector cover.
7. Remove the 2nd paper tray [D] and secure the paper tray unit with two screws
[E].
3-12
10 August, 2001 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
[A]
B390I602.WMF
[B]
B390I002.WMF
8. Reinstall the 2nd paper tray and attach the appropriate paper tray number
decal [A] to the paper tray.
NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier.
9. Rotate the adjuster [B] until the machine cannot be pushed across the floor.
10. Loads paper into the paper trays and select the proper paper size.
11. Turn on the main switch.
12. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality.
3-13
LCT INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
3.4 LCT INSTALLATION


1 Securing Bracket 2
2 Screw – M4x10 4
3 Paper Size Decal 1
[A]
B391I500.WMF
[B]
B391I505.WMF
!CAUTION

2. Set the copier [A] on the LCT [B].
NOTE: When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the cable [C].
3-14
10 August, 2001 LCT INSTALLATION
[C]
[A]
[B] B391I504.WMF
[C]
[D]
B391I501.WMF
3. Remove the connector cover [A] (1 screw).

4. Connect the cable [B] to the copier, as shown.
5. Attach a securing bracket [C] to each side of the LCT, as shown (1 screw
each).
6. Re-install the connector cover.
7. Remove the 2nd paper tray and secure the LCT with two screws [D].
3-15
LCT INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
[B]
[A]
B391I502.WMF
[C]
B391I506.WMF
8. Load paper into the LCT.

9. Reinstall the 2nd paper tray and attach the appropriate paper tray number
decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the LCT.
NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier.
10. Rotate the adjuster [C] until the machine cannot be pushed across the floor.
11. Loads paper into the paper tray and turn on the main switch.
12. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality.
3-16
10 August, 2001 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER INSTALLATION
3.5 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

INSTALLATION

1 Scale Guide 1
2 DF Exposure Glass 1
3 Stud Screw 2
4 Knob Screw 2
5 Original Size Decal 2
6 Screwdriver Tool 1
6 1
4 3
2
5 B386I500.WMF
B386I101.WMF
!CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
3-17
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
[E]
[D] [B]
[C]
[F] [A]
[F]
B386I103.WMF
[G]
[G]
[H]
B386I104.WMF
2. Remove the left scale [A] (2 screws).

3. Place the DF exposure glass [B] on the glass holder.
NOTE: When installing the DF exposure glass, make sure that the white point
[C] is on the lower front side of the glass, as shown.
4. Peel off the backing [D] of the double-sided tape attached to the rear side of the
scale guide [E], then install it (2 screws removed in step 2).
5. Install the two stud screws [F].
6. Mount the DF on the copier, then slide the DF to the front as shown.
7. Secure the DF unit with two screws [G].
8. Connect the cable [H] to the copier.
3-18
10 August, 2001 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER INSTALLATION
[A]
B386I501.WMF
9. Attach the appropriate scale decal [A] as shown.

10. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works
properly.
11. Make a full size copy. Then check to make sure the side-to-side and leading
edge registrations are correct. If they are not, adjust the side-to-side and
leading edge registrations (refer to the service manual).
3-19
INTERCHANGE UNIT INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
3.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT INSTALLATION

3.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.

1 Interchange Unit 1
2 Connector Cover 1
3 Tapping Screw M3x8 1
1
3
B416I101.WMF
3-20
10 August, 2001 INTERCHANGE UNIT INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D] [E]
[H]
B416I503.WMF
[F]
[G]
B416I502.WMF
!CAUTION
1. Remove all tapes.

2. Open the right cover [A] of the copier.
3. Open cover [B]
4. Remove the metal clip [C].
NOTE: To remove the clip, push the small tab [D] on the clip into the slot [E],
then the clip can be removed.
5. Remove the cover [B].
If the optional 1-bin tray unit (B413) will be installed, do steps 6 and 7.
6. Loosen the screw, push down tab [F] with a screwdriver, and remove the front
right cover [G].
7. Slide out the exit cover [H].
3-21
INTERCHANGE UNIT INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
[B]
[A]
B416I103.WMF
[D]
[C] B416I104.WMF
8. Open the cover [A] of the interchange unit.

9. Install the interchange unit (2 connectors) [B].
10. Secure the interchange unit with the knob screws [C].
11. Attach the connector cover [D] (1 screw).
3-22
10 August, 2001 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
3.7 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION


1 1-Bin Tray Unit 1
2 Tray 1
3 Sub-Tray 1
4 Tray Guide 1
5 Paper Guide 1
6 Tapping Screw M3x8 1
6
5 1
3
4
B413I101.WMF
[A]
B413I501.WMF
!CAUTION
NOTE: Before installing this 1-bin tray unit, the optional interchange unit (B416)
must be installed.
2. If the optional bridge unit has been installed, open the right jam removal cover
[A] of the bridge unit.
If the optional bridge unit is not installed, skip this step.
3-23
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
[C]
[A]
[B]
B413I500.WMF
[D]
[E]
B413I103.WMF
3. If the front right cover [A] is installed, remove it.

4. Install the 1-bin tray unit [B] (1 screw).
5. Connect the connector [C].
6. Reinstall the front right cover.
7. Peel off the backing [D] of the double-sided tape attached to the paper guide
[E]. Then attach the paper guide to the underside of the scanner unit as shown.
3-24
10 August, 2001 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
[A]
[C]
[B]
B413I105.WMF
12. Install the tray guide [A].

13. Install the tray [B].
14. Install the sub-tray [C].
15. Turn on the main power switch and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
3-25
SHIFT TRAY 10 August, 2001
3.8 SHIFT TRAY


1 Shift Tray Unit 1
2 Paper Guide - Large 1
3 Paper Guide - Small 2
4 Stepped Screw 1
2 3
4
1
B459I101.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
B459I102.WMF
[C]
!CAUTION

2. Remove the plate [A] (1 screw).
3. Install the large paper guide [B] and two small paper guides [C], as shown.
3-26
10 August, 2001 SHIFT TRAY
[C]
[B]
[D] [A]
B459I103.WMF
4. Install the stepped screw [A].

5. Install the shift tray unit [B], as shown.
NOTE: 1) Set the shift tray on the stepped screw.
2) The shift tray must be installed under the paper guide [C] installed in
step 3.
6. Connect the cable [D] to the copier.
7. Turn on the main power switch. Then select the shift tray using the UP mode
“2. Copier – 3. Input/Output – 6. Sort – Shift Sort”.
8. Check the shift tray operation.
3-27
BY-PASS FEED UNIT INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
3.9 BY-PASS FEED UNIT INSTALLATION

3.9.1 COMPONENTS CHECK

1 By-pass Tray Unit 1
2 Unit Holder 1
3 Tapping Screw 2
4 Allen Key 1
4
B415I101.WMF 1
[B]
[A]
[B]
B415I500.WMF
!CAUTION

2. Remove the entrance cover [A] (2 screws) and two screws [B].
3-28
10 August, 2001 BY-PASS FEED UNIT INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
B415I501.WMF B415I502.WMF
[C]
[D]
[D]
[C] B415I105.WMF B415I104.WMF
3. Install the unit holder [A] using the Allen key (4 set screws).
NOTE: 1) Make sure that the four screws are tightened in the proper order, as
shown above. Otherwise, when the optional duplex unit (B414) is
installed, it will not properly lock in place.
2) After securing the unit, store the Allen key in the inner cover [B] for
future use.
4. If the optional duplex unit (B414) will be installed: Remove the indicated
parts [C] of the by-pass tray unit [D].
5. Install the by-pass tray unit (2 screws, 1 connector).
6. Turn the main power switch on and check the by-pass tray function.
7. Make a copy from the by-pass tray. Then check the registration.
3-29
DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
3.10 DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLATION


1 Duplex Unit 1
2 Connector Cover 1
3 Bracket 1
4 Clip 1
5 Unit Holder 1
6 Unit Holder Cover 1
7 Allen Key 1
8 Tapping Screw - M3x8 4
5 1
B414I101.WMF
2
3 8
4 B414I102.WMF
3-30
10 August, 2001 DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
[E]
[A]
[C]
[D] B414I103.WMF [F] B414I501.WMF

[D]
[G]
B414I500.WMF
!CAUTION
NOTE: Before installing the duplex unit, the optional interchange unit (B416)
must be installed.
2. Remove three covers [A].
3. Remove the connector cover [B] (1 screw), the entrance cover [C] (2 screws; if
the by-pass tray has not been installed), and two screws [D].
4. Install the bracket [E] (1 screw).
5. If the by-pass tray has already been installed, skip this step: Install the unit
holder [F] using the Allen key (4 set screws).
NOTE: 1) Make sure that the four screws are tightened in the proper order, as
shown above. Otherwise, the duplex unit will not properly lock in place.
2) After securing the unit, store the Allen key in the inner cover [G] for
future use.
3-31
DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
[C]
[D]
[A]
[F]
[B] [E]
[G]
B414I104.WMF
6. Set the duplex unit [A] on the unit holder [B] or on the by-pass tray unit if it has
already been installed.
7. Attach the link [C] to the shaft [D] and secure it with the clip.
8. Connect the cable [E] and install the connector cover [F] (1 screw).
9. If the by-pass tray has already been installed, skip this step: Install the unit
holder cover [G] (2 screws).
10. Turn on the main power switch and check the duplex unit function.
3-32
10 August, 2001 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION
3.11 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION


1 Bridge Unit 1
2 Securing Plate 1
3 Shoulder Screw 1
4 Knob Screw 1
2
4
1
3
B417I101.WMF

- For A265 and A267 copiers -
[A]
[C]
[B]
B417I501.WMF B417I500.WMF
!CAUTION

2. Loosen the screw [A] and remove the front right cover [B].
3. If the sensor feeler [C] is out, fold it away into the machine.
3-33
BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
[C]
[A]
[D] [B]
B417I102.WMF
[E]
B417I103.WMF
4. Remove the cover [A] (1 screw).

5. Install the bridge unit [B] (1 shoulder screw, 1 knob screw).
6. Reinstall the front right cover [C].
7. Connect the cable [D] to the main machine.
8. Attach the securing plate [E], as shown.
NOTE: Do not attach it with a screw; this is done when securing the front stand
for the optional finisher.
9. Install the optional finisher (refer to the finisher installation procedure).
3-34
10 August, 2001 1,000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
3.12 1,000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION

2 1
6 7 4
5
3
8 B408I101.WMF
9

1 Front Joint Bracket 1
2 Rear Joint Bracket 1
3 Grounding Plate 1
4 Copy Tray 1
5 Staple Position Decal 1
6 Screw - M4x17 3
7 Knob Screw – M4x10 1
8 Screw - M3x8 1
9 Knob Screw – M3x8 1
3-35
1,000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
[A]
B408I102.WMF
B408I103.WMF
!CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: If this finisher will be installed on the B022 or B027 copier, the following
options must be installed before installing this finisher.
Bridge Unit (B417)
Paper Tray Unit (B390) or LCT (B391)
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
NOTE: Be sure to keep screw [A]. It will be needed to secure the grounding
plate in step 4.
3-36
10 August, 2001 1,000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
[H]
[C]
B408I104.WMF
[F]
[G]
[E]
B408I105.WMF [D]
2. Install the front joint bracket [A] (2 screws – M4x17) and rear joint bracket [B]
(1 screw – M4x17).
3. Remove the left stand [C] (3 screws)
4. Install the lower grounding plate [D] on the finisher (2 screws – M3x8).
NOTE: Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory
box.
5. Open the front door [E]. Then pull the locking lever [F].
6. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the
locking lever.
7. Secure the locking lever (1 knob screw – M3x8) and close the front door.
8. Install the copy tray [G] (1 knob screw – M4x10).
9. Connect the finisher cable [H] to the main machine.
3-37
1,000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
[A]
B408I501.WMF
10. Attach the staple position decal [A] to the ARDF as shown.
11. Turn on the ac switch and check the finisher operation.
3-38
10 August, 2001 500-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
3.13 500-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION

1
4 5
B442I101.WMF

1 Unit Holder 1
2 Entrance Guide 1
3 Output Tray 1
4 Snap Ring 2
5 Knob Screw 2
3-39
500-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
[A]
[B]
B442I103.WMF
[C]
B442I104.WMF
!CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the 500-sheet finisher, the optional bridge unit (B417)
must be installed.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
2. Install the entrance guide [A].
3. Install the unit holder [B] (2 screws).
4. Install the 500-sheet finisher [C].
3-40
10 August, 2001 500-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
B442I105.WMF
5. Install the output tray [A] as shown (2 snap rings).

6. Connect the finisher cable [B].
7. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
3-41
PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
3.14 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
[A]
B027I555.WMF
1. Install the platen cover [A] (2 screws).
3-42
10 August, 2001 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
3.14.1 MEMORY (G578/G579)
!CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[A]
B453I101.WMF
[C] B453I503.WMF
[D]
B453I109.WMF
1. Remove the connector cover [A] and rear cover [B] (4 screws).
2. Remove the shield cover [C] (7 screws).
3. Install the memory DIMM [D] on the controller board.
4. Replace the controller board cover and rear cover.
3-43
PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
3.14.2 HDD (B420)
!CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[E]
[A]
[C]
B453I102.WMF
[D]
B453I103.WMF
[G]
[F]
B453I101.WMF
1. Attach the HDD [A] to the HDD bracket [B] (4 stepped screws).
NOTE: The PCB side of the HDD must face the HDD bracket.
2. Attach the shield plate [C] to the HDD (4 – M3x3 screws).
3. Connect the cable [D] to the HDD.
NOTE: The marked location [E] which is not a pinhole must face the HDD.
4. Remove the connector cover [F] and rear cover [G] (4 screws).
3-44
10 August, 2001 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
[B]
[C]
[D]
B453I104.WMF
[A]
B453I105.WMF
5. Connect the other end of the cable to CN509 [A] on the controller board, then
install the HDD assembly [B] (2 screws).
6. Replace the rear cover and connector board.
7. Replace the key tops for the appropriate units to be installed.
C: Copy
D: Document Server
3-45
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION 10 August, 2001
3.15 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
[D]
B027I231.WMF
[E]
[C]
[F]
[G]
B027I500.WMF
!CAUTION
1. Remove two caps [A].

2. Connect the key counter cable [B].
3. Install the stepped screw [C].
4. Hold the key counter plate nuts [D] on the inside of the key counter bracket [E]
and insert the key counter holder [F].
5. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket (2 screws).
6. Install the key counter cover [G] (2 screws).
3-46
10 August, 2001 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B027I232.WMF
7. Connect the cable [A].

8. Hook the key counter holder assembly [B] onto the stepped screw [C].
9. Secure the key counter holder assembly with a screw [D].
10. Set SP5-401-2 to 1 (This enables the restricted access control function.)
NOTE: The key counter function is made available for other modes by
changing the following SP modes.
• SP5-401-12 (Document server mode)
• SP5-401-22 (Fax mode)
• SP5-401-32 (Scanner mode)
• SP5-401-42 (Printer mode)
3-47
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER 10 August, 2001
3.16 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[H]
[F]
B027I001.WMF
[G] B027I304.WMF
!CAUTION
1. Remove the rear scale [A] (3 screws), left scale [B] (2 screws), and exposure
glass [C].
NOTE: When reinstalling the exposure glass, make sure that the mark [D] is
positioned at the rear left corner, as shown.
2. Move the 1st and 2nd scanners to the right.
3. Install the cable clamp [E].
4. Install the anti-condensation heater [F] (2 screws).
5. Join the connectors [G]
6. Attach the cable cover [H], as shown.
3-48
10 August, 2001 TRAY HEATER
3.17 TRAY HEATER
[B]
[D]
[A] B027I510.WMF
[C]
[E]
B027I502.WMF
!CAUTION
1. Remove the connector cover [A] and rear cover [B] (4 screws).
2. Slide out the 1st and 2nd paper trays.
3. Pass the connector [C] through the opening [D].
4. Install the tray heater assembly [E] (1 screw).
3-49
TRAY HEATER 10 August, 2001
[E]
[A]
[B]
B027I501.WMF
[B]
[D]
[C]
B027I513.WMF
5. Remove the 2nd paper lift motor [A] (2 screws, 1 connector).

6. Route the heater cable [B] to the side of rivet [C] and under bracket [D].
7. Clamp the heater cable [B] as shown.
8. Joint the heater cable and the ac cable [E].
9. Reinstall the paper lift motor [A] and reassemble the machine.
3-50
10 August, 2001 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
3.18 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
[A]
[B]
B027I506.WMF
[A]
[D]
[C]
[D]
B027I509.WMF
!CAUTION
1. Remove the joint brackets [A] (1 screw each).

2. Remove the rear cover [B] for the optional paper tray unit (2 screws).
3. Remove the cable guide [C] (1 screw).
4. Install the clamps [D].
3-51
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) 10 August, 2001
[B]
[A]
[C]
B027I503.WMF
[D]
[E]
[D]
B027I505.WMF
5. Slide out the two paper trays from the optional paper tray unit.
6. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B].
7. Install the tray heater assembly [C] (1 screw).
8. Clamp the cables [D], as shown.
9. Join the connectors [E].
10. Reinstall the cable guide.
3-52
10 August, 2001 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
[A]
B027I508.WMF
[C]
[B]
[C] B027I504.WMF
11. Remove two screws [A] from the rear side of the paper feed unit.
12. Reinstall the rear cover for the optional paper tray unit.
13. Reinstall the two paper trays into the optional paper tray unit.
14. Remove the 2nd paper tray of the copier.
15. Remove two screws [B] and install the screws [C] which were removed in step
12.
16. Reinstall the 2nd paper tray of the copier.
3-53
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT) 10 August, 2001
3.19 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
[A]
[D]
[B]
B027I506.WMF
[A]
[F] [E]
[C]
B027I101.WMF
[D]
[G]
B027I507.WMF
!CAUTION
1. Remove two joint brackets [A] (1 screw each).

2. Remove the rear cover for the LCT [B] (2 screws).
3. Slide out the paper tray [C].
4. Push the stopper [D] on both slide rails and remove the paper tray.
5. Pass the connector [E] through the opening [F].
6. Install the tray heater [G] (1 screw).
3-54
10 August, 2001 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
[A]
[C] [A]
B027I252.WMF
[B]
[D]
[E]
B027I253.WMF
7. Install five clamps [A].

8. Connect the cable [B] to the tray heater cable [C].
9. Route the cable and clamp it.
10. Remove the connector cover of the copier [D].
11. Join the connectors [E].
12. Reinstall the connector cover of the copier.
3-55
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT) 10 August, 2001
[A]
B027I601.WMF
[B]
[B]
[C]
B027I600.WMF
13. Remove two screws [A] from the rear side of the LCT.
14. Reinstall the rear cover of the LCT.
15. Reinstall the paper tray.
16. Remove the 2nd paper tray of the copier.
17. Remove two screws [B] and install the screws [C] which were removed in step
13.
18. Reinstall the 2nd paper tray of the copier.
3-56
10 August, 2001 GENERAL CAUTION
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.1 GENERAL CAUTION
!CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a fax
machine or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard
disk or memory for reading or writing data.
Do not turn off the main switch while any of the electrical components are active.
Doing so might cause damage to units, such as the PCU, when they are pulled out
of or put back into the copier.
Service
Tables
4.1.1 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT)
The PCU consists of the OPC drum, development unit, charge roller, and cleaning
unit. Follow the cautions below when handling a PCU.
1. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface is
touched or becomes dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton.
Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with the cotton.
2. Never used alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface.
3. Store the PCU in a cool, dry place away from heat.
4. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
5. Never shake the used PCU. Doing so may cause toner and/or developer to spill
out.
6. Dispose of used PCUs in accordance with local regulations.
4.1.2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT

1. Never touch the transfer roller surface with bare hands.
2. Take care not to scratch the transfer roller as the surface is easily damaged.
4.1.3 SCANNER UNIT

1. Clean the exposure glass with alcohol or with glass cleaner to reduce the
amount of static electricity on the surface of the glass.
2. Use a blower brush or a cotton pad with water to clean the mirrors and lens.
4-1
GENERAL CAUTION 10 August, 2001
3. Do not bend or crease the exposure lamp flat cable.

4. Do not disassemble the lens unit. Doing so will throw the lens and the copy
image out of focus.
5. Do not turn any of the CCD positioning screws. Doing so will throw the CCD out
of position.
4.1.4 LASER UNIT

1. Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode
casing. Doing so will throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the
factory.
3. The polygon mirror and F-theta mirror are very sensitive to dust.
4. Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare
hands.
4.1.5 FUSING UNIT

1. After installing the fusing thermistor, make sure that it is in contact with the hot
roller and that the hot roller can rotate freely.
2. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers or their tension
springs.
3. Do not touch the fusing lamp and rollers with bare hands.
4. Make sure that the fusing lamp is positioned correctly and that it does not touch
the inner surface of the hot roller.
4.1.6 PAPER FEED

1. Do not touch the surface of the paper feed roller.
2. To avoid paper misfeeds, the side fences and end fences of the paper tray
must be positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size.
4.1.7 OTHERS
1. The TD sensor initial setting is performed automatically after installing the new
PCU and closing the front cover. Never open the front cover or turn off the main
switch during this time. The main motor stops when the initial setting has
finished.
2. The toner bottle should be replaced while the main switch is on.
3. If the optional tray, drum, and optics anti-condensation heaters have been
installed, keep the copier power cord plugged in, even when the copier main
switch is turned off. This keeps the heaters energized.
4-2
10 August, 2001 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

4.2.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program mode is used to check electrical data, change modes, and
adjust values. Two service program modes are provided:
• SP Mode (Service). Includes all the options in the SP displays for normal
maintenance and adjustments.
• SSP Mode (Special Service). Includes the normal SP modes and some
additional options in the SP displays not required for normal settings and
adjustments. (Most are marked “DFU” in the following tables.) Do not change
these important settings needlessly. For details, contact your supervisor.
Entering and Exiting SP mode

" 1. Press the Clear Mode key.
#$% 2. Use the keypad to enter “107”.
& 3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
Service
Tables
4. Enter the Service Mode.
To enter the Normal Service Mode:
Copy SP On the touch-panel, press Copy SP.
To enter the Special Service Mode:
' Copy SP Hold down ' and then press Copy SP.
Exit 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
NOTE: Use SP2-902 to perform test pattern printing. (☛ 4.2.3)
4-3
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 10 August, 2001
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
B027S500.WMF
! Opens all SP groups and sublevels.

" Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
# Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. To return to the
SP mode screen, press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window.
$ Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then
press '. (SP Mode must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just
press SP Mode if it is not highlighted.)
% Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
& Press any Group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group. For
example, to open the SP code list for SP1-nnn, press Group1. If an SP has
sublevels, touch the appropriate button to expand the list.
' Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
( Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen
display (page).
) Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
* Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
4-4
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start ( to execute the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to
adjust. (☛ 4.2.2)
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand the
list.
Service
Tables
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated and
displays the default or the current setting below.
B027S501.WMF
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. (☛ 4.2.2)
1. To enter a setting
• Press ! to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to
enter the appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous
setting.
• Press ' to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
• When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
2. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy
window and select the settings for the test print. Press Start ( twice, and then
press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode
display.
3. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
4-5
4.2.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

Service Table Key
Notation What it means
[range / default / Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be
step] adjusted in the range ±9, the setting is reset to +3.0 after an
NVRAM reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps
with each key press.
italics Comments added for reference.
* Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value
(factory setting) is restored.
1111 An SP number set in bold-italic denotes a “Special Service
Program” mode setting that appears only after entering the SP
mode by pressing ' and Copy SP together. (☛ 4.2.1)
DFU Denotes “Design or Factory Use”. Do not change this value.
Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
(S) Sideways feed direction
(L) Lengthwise feed direction
SP1-XXX: Feed
1 Mode Number/Name Function/[Setting]
001* Leading Edge Registration
1 Paper Tray Feed Adjusts the printing leading edge registration from
2 By-pass Feed each paper feed station using the Trimming Area
3 Duplex, Side2 Pattern (SP4-417, No.15).
Use the ! key to toggle between + and – before
entering the value.
The specification is 3 ± 2 mm.
See “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy Adjustment”
for details.
[+9.0 ~ –9.0 / +0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
002* Side-to-Side Registration
1 1st Paper Feed Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration from each
2 2nd Paper Feed paper feed station using the Trimming Area Pattern
3 3rd Paper Feed: (SP4-417, No.15).
optional PFU tray 1 or Use the ! key to toggle between + and – before
optional LCT entering the value. The specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm.
4 4th Paper Feed: See “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy Adjustment”
optional PFU tray 2 for details.
5 By-pass Feed [+9.0 ~ –9.0 / +0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
6 Duplex, Side2
003* Paper Feed Timing
1 1st Paper Feed Adjusts the paper feed clutch timing at registration.
2 2nd, 3rd, 4th Paper The paper feed clutch timing determines the amount of
Feed, LCT, and By-pass paper buckle at registration. (A larger setting leads to
Feed more buckling.)
[0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step]
3 Duplex, Side2 [0 ~ 20 / 6 / 1 mm/step]
4-6

007 By-pass Paper Size Display
Displays the by-pass paper width sensor output.
103 Fusing Idling
Switches fusing idling on/off.
Switch on if fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is
incomplete (this may occur if the room is cold.)
[1 = On / 0 = Off]
105* Fusing Temperature Adjustment
1 Roller Center Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center and both
2 Roller Ends ends of the hot roller for normal printing.
[120 ~ 200 / 165 / 1°C/step]
3 Energy Saver Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center and both
ends of the hot roller for energy saver mode.
[0 ~ 160 / 150 / 1°C/step]
4 Thick Paper (Center) Adjusts the additional fusing temperature for thick
5 Thick Paper (Ends) paper for the 2nd paper tray and for the bypass tray.
[0 ~ 160 / 20 / 1°C/step]
6 After Warming-up Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot
(Center) roller after the machine has warmed up.
Service
Tables
[120 ~ 220 / 165 / 1°C/step]
7 After Warming-up Adjusts the fusing temperature at both ends of the hot
(Ends) roller after the machine has warmed up.
[120 ~ 220 / 175 / 1°C/step]
8 Number of Pages In this machine, fusing temperature is kept 10°C higher
than the normal temperature for a number of pages
after the machine has warmed up. This SP selects the
number of pages made at this temperature. See
Detailed Section Descriptions – Fusing for more
details.
[0 ~ 10 / 3 / 1 page/step]
9 Times In this machine, fusing temperature is kept 10°C higher
than the normal temperature for a short while after the
machine been warmed up. This SP selects the length
of time that this temperature is used. See Detailed
Section Descriptions – Fusing for more details.
[0 ~ 180 / 60 / 1s/step]
106 Fusing Temp. Display
1 Roller Center Displays the fusing temperature for the center or both
2 Roller Ends ends of the hot roller.
3 In the Machine at Power Displays the temperature in the machine at power on.
On This temperature is monitored by the thermistor on the
SBCU board.
108* Fusing Soft Start Setting
1 Selects whether the fusing temperature control cycle is
1 or 3 seconds.
If this is “1 (3 s)”, the power supply fluctuation caused
by the fusing lamp turning on is less often.
[0 = 1 s / 1 = 3 s]
Default: 0 = N. America, 1 = Europe/Asia
4-7

109 Fusing Nip Band Check
Checks the fusing nip band (☛ 4.2.11)
[1 = Start / 0 = Stop]
902 AC Frequency Display
Displays the fusing lamp power control frequency
which is detected by the zero cross signal generator.
Under “54” equals 50 Hz. Otherwise, 60 Hz.
903* Feed Clutch Re-energize
1 By-pass Feed Adjusts the paper feed amount allowed by the clutch
(see the table below) after correcting the skew at
registration.
[0 ~ 10 / 6 / 1 mm/step]
Paper Feed Station Clutch
By-pass Feed Upper Relay
1st Paper Tray 1st Paper Feed
Other Paper Trays Upper Relay
2 1st Paper Tray When paper jams occur after restarting paper feed
3 Other Paper Trays after registration, increase the value to help the
registration roller feed the paper.
[0 ~ 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
905* Tray Paper Full Detection
Determines whether or not to detect if the built-in copy
tray is full.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
906* Tray Paper Full Timer
Adjusts the time that the paper overflow sensor must
remain on before a message appears on the LCD. The
sensor may be switched on and off again if the paper
is curled, giving a false tray full detection. This SP
prevents this problem.
This SP mode is used when SP1-905 is set to 1.
[100 ~ 5000 / 500 / 10 ms/step]
908* 1st Bottom Plate Pressure Adjustment
1 Normal Size If a middle size threshold is not stored with SP1-908-9,
this SP adjusts the upper paper lift motor reverse time
for paper sizes larger than the small size threshold set
with SP1-908-8.
If a middle size threshold is stored with SP1-908-9,
then this SP adjusts the motor reverse time for sizes
larger than the middle size.
Do not input a value greater than 1,200.
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs from
the 1st paper tray.
See “Paper Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1-908.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
4-8

908* 2 Small Size Adjusts the upper paper lift motor reverse time for
paper of the same size as or smaller than the small
size threshold set with SP1-908-8.
Do not input a value greater than 1200.
the 1st paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 600 / 1 ms/step]
3 Middle Size Adjusts the upper paper lift motor reverse time for
paper sizes larger than the small size threshold set
with SP1-908-8, up to and including the middle size
threshold set with SP1-908-9. If a middle size
threshold is not stored with SP1-908-9, this SP is not
used.
the 1st paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
1st Bottom Plate Pressure Re-adjustment
Service
Tables
4 Small Size Adjusts the upper paper lift motor forward rotation time
for paper of the same size as or smaller than the small
size threshold set with SP1-908-8. The motor rotates
forward when the remaining paper amount is lower
than the value of SP1-908-6.
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs when
paper in the 1st paper tray is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 400 / 1 ms/step]
5 Middle Size Adjusts the upper paper lift motor forward rotation time
threshold set with SP1-908-9.
The motor rotates forward when the amount of
remaining paper is lower than the value of SP1-908-7.
If a middle size threshold is not stored with SP1-908-9,
this SP is not used.
paper in the 1st paper tray is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 300 / 1 ms/step]
1st Paper Amount
6 Small Size Selects the remaining paper amount limit for use with
SP1-908-4.
Set this SP to 2 or 3 when a paper feed problem
occurs before near-end.
[0 = None (Empty) / 1 = Near End / 2 = 25% / 3 = 75%]
7 Middle Size Selects the remaining paper amount limit for use with
SP1-908-5.
4-9

908* 1st Paper Size
8 1st Small Paper Size Selects the small size threshold for the 1st paper tray.
Setting “0” means that this setting is not used.
The size used by SP1-908 is determined by paper
width. See “Paper Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1-
908.
[0 = None (Not used) / 1 = HLT/A5 / 2 = A4 / 3 = LT / 4
= DLT / 5 = A3]
9 1st Middle Paper Size Selects the middle size threshold for the upper tray.
The value must be larger than the small size threshold
(SP1-908-8). The size used by SP1-908 is determined
by paper width. See “Paper Lift Mechanism” for details
on SP1-908.
[0 = None (Not used) / 1 = HLT/A5 / 2 = A4 / 3 = LT /
4 = DLT / 5 = A3]
909* 2nd Bottom Plate Pressure Adjustment
this SP adjusts the upper paper lift motor reverse time
with SP1-909-8.
the 2nd paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
2 Small Size Adjusts the upper paper lift motor reverse time for
paper of the same size as or smaller than the small
the 2nd paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 600 / 1 ms/step]
paper sizes larger than the small size threshold set
used.
the 2nd paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
4-10

909* 2nd Bottom Plate Pressure Re-adjustment
for paper of the same size as or smaller than the small
paper in the 2nd paper tray is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 400 / 1 ms/step]
5 Middle Size Adjusts the upper paper lift motor forward rotation time
The motor rotates forward when the remaining paper
amount is lower than the value of SP1-909-7.
paper in the 2nd paper tray is running low.
Service
Tables
[0 ~ 2000 / 300 / 1 ms/step]
2nd Paper Amount
SP1-909-4.
7 Middle Size Set this SP to 2 or 3 when a paper feed problem
2nd Paper Size
8 2nd Small Paper Size Selects the small size threshold for the 2nd paper tray.
The size used by SP1-909 is determined by paper
width. See “Paper Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1-
909.
= DLT / 5 = A3]
9 2nd Middle Paper Size Selects the middle size threshold for the upper tray.
The value must be larger than the small size threshold
by paper width. See “Paper Lift Mechanism” for details
on SP1-909.
4 = DLT / 5 = A3]
4-11

910* 3rd Bottom Plate Pressure Adjustment
(Optional PFU) this SP adjusts the upper paper lift motor reverse time
with SP1-910-8.
the 3rd paper tray.
See “Optional Paper Tray Unit - Paper Lift Mechanism”
for details on SP1-910.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
(Optional PFU) paper of the same size as or smaller than the small
the 3rd paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 600 / 1 ms/step]
(Optional PFU) paper sizes larger than the small size threshold set
used.
the 3rd paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
3rd Bottom Plate Pressure Re-adjustment
(Optional PFU) for paper of the same size as or smaller than the small
paper in the 3rd paper tray is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 400 / 1 ms/step]
4-12

910* 5 Middle Size Adjusts the upper paper lift motor forward rotation time
(Optional PFU) for paper sizes larger than the small size threshold set
The motor rotates forward when the remaining paper is
lower than the value of SP1-910-7.
paper in the 3rd paper tray is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 300 / 1 ms/step]
3rd Paper Amount
(Optional PFU) SP1-910-4.
Service
Tables
3rd Paper Size
8 3rd Small Paper Size Selects the small size threshold for the 3rd paper tray.
(Optional PFU) The size used by SP1-910 is determined by paper
width. See “Optional Paper Tray Unit - Paper Lift
Mechanism” for details on SP1-910.
= DLT / 5 = A3]
9 3rd Middle Paper Size Selects the middle size threshold for the upper tray.
(Optional PFU) The value must be larger than the small size threshold
by paper width. See “Optional Paper Tray Unit - Paper
Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1-910.
4 = DLT / 5 = A3]
4-13

911* 4th Bottom Plate Pressure Adjustment
(Optional PFU) this SP adjusts the upper paper lift motor reverse time
with SP1-911-8.
the 4th paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
(Optional PFU) paper of the same size as or smaller than the small
the 4th paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 600 / 1 ms/step]
(Optional PFU) paper sizes larger than the small size threshold set
used.
the 4th paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
4th Bottom Plate Pressure Re-adjustment
(Optional PFU) for paper of the same size as or smaller than the small
paper in the 4th paper tray is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 400 / 1 ms/step]
4-14

911* 5 Middle Size Adjusts the upper paper lift motor forward rotation time
(Optional PFU) for paper sizes larger than the small size threshold set
The motor rotates forward when the remaining paper
amount is lower than the value of SP1-911-7.
paper in the 4th paper tray is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 300 / 1 ms/step]
4th Paper Amount
Service
Tables
4th Paper Size
8 4th Small Paper Size Selects the small size threshold for the 4th paper tray.
(Optional PFU) The size used by SP1-911 is determined by paper
width. See “Optional Paper Tray Unit - Paper Lift
Mechanism” for details on SP1-911.
= DLT / 5 = A3]
9 4th Middle Paper Size Selects the middle size threshold for the upper tray.
(Optional PFU) The value must be larger than the small size threshold
by paper width. See “Optional Paper Tray Unit - Paper
Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1-911.
4 = DLT / 5 = A3]
912* Tray Motor Reverse Time
Adjusts the tray motor reverse time.
The tray motor reverses when the tray is pulled out.
The tray can be put back in the machine without
damage while the motor reverses.
[0 ~ 9000 / 1700 / 1 ms/step]
4-15

994 Punch Hole Detection
When using paper that has punch holes, the
registration sensor may detect the hole and a paper
jam will be detected. If you select “1”, the machine
ignores the registration sensor off signal within 50 mm
from the trailing edge of the paper.
[0 = No 1 = Yes]
SP2-XXX: Drum
001* Charge Roller Bias Adjustment
1* Printing Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller during
printing.
This value will be changed automatically when the
charge roller bias correction is performed.
Note that if this value is changed, the charge roller
voltage will be corrected based on the new voltage.
[2100 ~ 1500 / –1700 / 1 V/step]
2* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when
Adjustment making the Vsdp ID sensor pattern (for charge roller
(ID sensor pattern) bias correction).
The actual charge roller voltage is this value plus the
value of SP2-001-1.
[0 ~ 400 / 200 / 1 V/step]
3 Charge Roller Bias Inputs the charge roller voltage temporarily for test
Adjustment purposes.
(Temporally input) Do not change the value.
[0 ~ –2500 / 0 / 1 V/step]
005* Charge Roller Bias Correction
1 Vsdp Minimum Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller
correction.
When the value of Vsdp/Vsg is less than this value, the
charge roller voltage increases by 50V (e.g. from –500
to –550). The size of the increase depends on SP2-
005-3.
[0 ~ 100 / 90 / 1%/step]
2 Vsdp Maximum Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller
correction.
When the value of Vsdp/Vsg is greater than this value,
the charge roller voltage decreases by 50V (e.g. from –
550 to –500). The size of the decrease depends on
SP2-005-3.
[0 ~ 100 / 95 / 1 %/step]
3 Step Adjusts the size of the charge roller voltage correction.
[0 ~ 200 / 50 / 1 V/step]
4-16

101* Erase Margin Adjustment
1 Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge erase margin.
The specification is 3 ± 2 mm. See “Replacement and
Adjustment - Copy Adjustment” for details.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2 Trailing Edge – Small Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for paper of
Paper Size length 216 mm or less.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
3 Trailing Edge – Middle Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for paper of
Paper Size length 216.1 ~ 297 mm.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4 Trailing Edge – Large Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for paper longer
Paper Size than 297 mm.
Service
Tables
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 4.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
5 Left Side Adjusts the left edge erase margin.
The specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm. See “Replacement
and Adjustment - Copy Adjustment” for details.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
6 Right Side Adjusts the right edge erase margin.
The specification is 2 + 2.5/-1.5 mm. See
“Replacement and Adjustment - Copy Adjustment” for
details.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
7 Rear – Trailing Edge Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin on the reverse
side of duplex copies.
The actual trailing edge erase margin on the reverse
side is this value plus the value of SP2-101-2 or 3 or 4.
Adjustment - Copy Adjustment” for details
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 1.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
8 Rear – Left Side Adjusts the left side erase margin on the reverse side
of duplex copies.
The actual left side erase margin on the reverse side is
this value plus the value of SP2-101-5.
The specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm. See “Replacement
and Adjustment - Copy Adjustment” for details.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
9 Rear – Right Side Adjusts the right side erase margin on the reverse side
of duplex copies.
The actual right side erase margin on the reverse side
is this value plus the value of SP2-101-6.
The specification is 2 +2.5/–1.5 mm. See
details.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
4-17

101* 10 Printer, Rear Trailing In printer mode, adjusts the trailing edge erase margin
Edge on the reverse side of duplex copies.
The actual trailing edge erase margin on the reverse
side is this value plus the value of SP2-101-7.
Adjustment - Copy Adjustment” for details
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
103* LD Power Adjustment
Adjusts the LD power. DFU
Do not change the value.
[50 ~ 170 / 129 / 1/step]
110* Test Mode dpi
Sets the scanning resolution (dpi). DFU
[See below / 8 / 0~18]
0: 400x400 dpi 1: 391x406 dpi
2: 406x391 dpi 4: 300x300 dpi
8: 600x600 dpi 15: 439x430 dpi
16: 476x476 dpi 17: 483x465 dpi
18: 465x483 dpi
201* Development Bias Adjustment
1 Printing Adjusts the development bias during printing.
This can be adjusted as a temporary measure if faint
copies appear due to an aging drum.
[–1500 ~ 2000 / –650 / 1 V/step]
2 ID sensor pattern Adjusts the development bias for making the ID sensor
pattern.
The actual development voltage for the ID sensor
pattern is this value plus the value of SP2-201-1.
This should not be used in the field, because it affects
ID sensor pattern density, which affects toner supply.
[0 = N (200V) / 1 = H (240V) / 2 = L (160V) / 3 = HH
(280V) / 4 = LL (120V)]
210* Bias Off Time
1 Charge Bias Adjusts the charge voltage (-1200V) application time.
DFU
When the charge voltage and development bias are
turned off at the same time, toner or carrier will be
attracted to the drum. To reduce the toner or carrier
attraction, the machine applies –1200V to the charge
roller before the development bias is turned off. This
SP adjusts the time for applying the charge.
[0 ~ 150 / 80 / 1 ms /step]
2 Development Bias Adjusts the development bias off time.
DFU
[-120 ~ 120 / 0 / 1ms/step]
4-18

211* PCU Reverse Interval
Adjusts the PCU reverse interval for cleaning during a
job.
When the machine has made this number of copies in
the middle of a job, the machine reverses to clean the
edge of the cleaning blade. After cleaning, the machine
resumes the job. Set to a shorter interval if thin white
lines appear on printouts.
0: Cleaning is never done in the middle of a job
[0 ~ 999 / 100 / 1 sheet/step]
213* Copies after Near End
Selects the number of copies that can be made after
toner near-end has been detected.
If the user normally makes copies with a high
proportion of black, reduce the interval.
[0 = 50 pages / 1 = 20 pages]
220* Vt/Vsg/Vsp/Vsdp/Vts Data Display
1 Vsp Displays the Vt, Vsg, Vsp, Vsdp, and Vts values.
2 Vsg
Service
Tables
3 Vsdp
4 Vt
5 Vts
301* Transfer Current
1* Normal Paper Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller during
copying from a paper tray when the user uses the
“Normal” paper setting.
If the user normally feeds thicker paper from a paper
tray, use a higher setting.
[0 = –2 µA / 1 = 0 µA / 2 = +2 µA / 3 = +4 µA]
2* Thick/Thin Paper Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller during
copying from the by-pass tray. These settings are also
used if the 2nd tray is used and special paper is
selected.
If the user normally feeds thicker paper from the by-
pass tray/2nd tray (special paper), use a higher setting.
If waste toner is re-attracted from the drum (this can
occur when using an OHP sheet), use a higher setting.
[0 = –2 µA / 1 = 0 µA / 2 = +2 µA / 3 = +4 µA]
3* Duplex, Side2 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller during
copying from the duplex unit when the user uses the
“Normal” paper setting.
Use this SP when the image on the rear side of the
paper has a problem caused by poor image transfer.
[0 = –2 µA / 1 = 0 µA / 2 = +2 µA / 3 = +4 µA]
4* Cleaning Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller during
roller cleaning.
If toner remains on the roller after cleaning (dirty
background appears on the rear side of the paper),
increase the current.
[0 ~ 10 / –4 / 1 µA/step]
5 Input – Front This is for the designer’s test purposes.
Do not change the value.
[0 ~ 30 / 0 / 1 µA/step]
4-19

301* 6 Input – Rear
7 Temp inside the Displays the temperature measured inside the
machine machine just after power-on (by the thermistor on the
SBCU board) the last time that the fusing unit was less
than 40°C just after the machine was switched on.
The transfer current is corrected in accordance with
this value.
801 Developer Initialization
Initializes the developer and resets the TD and ID
sensor outputs to their defaults.
Use this if the machine did not detect the new PCU
when it was installed, and the TD/ID sensors were not
initialized.
802 Developer Mixing
Mixes the developer and checks Vt. The machine
mixes the developer for 2 minutes and while doing this,
it reads the TD sensor output (Vt). It does not initialize
the TD sensor output.
If the machine has not been used for a long time, prints
may have a dirty background. In this case, use this SP
mode to mix the developer.
803* Developer Initialization Data
1 TD Sensor Displays the TD sensor output after performing the
developer initialization. This value will be used in fixed
supply mode.
2 ID Sensor PWM Value Displays the PWM value of the ID sensor after
performing the developer initialization.
901* Separation Voltage Adjustment
1 Front – Leading Edge Adjusts the voltage that is applied to the separation
plate during printing at the leading edge of the paper
on the front side.
If the copies have pawl marks at the leading edge,
increase this voltage.
[–1000 ~ 4000 / –1800 / 1 V/step]
2 Front – Image Area Adjusts the voltage that is applied to the separation
plate during printing on the image area of the paper on
the front side.
If the copies have pawl marks in the image area,
increase this voltage.
[–1000 ~ 4000 / –1800 / 1 V/step]
3 Rear – Leading Edge Adjusts the voltage applied to the separation plate,
during printing at the leading edge of the paper on the
rear side.
See SP2-901-1.
[–1000 ~ 4000 / –2100 / 1 V/step]
4 Rear – Image Area Adjusts the voltage applied to the separation plate,
during printing at the image area of the paper on the
rear side.
See SP2-901-2.
[–1000 ~ 4000 / –2100 / 1 V/step]
4-20

902* Test Pattern Printing
3 Prints the test patterns. Select the number of the test
pattern that you want to print (☛ 4.2.3).
When adjusting the printing registration, select no.10
(Trimming Area Pattern).
[0 ~ 41 / 0 / 1 step]
906* Tailing Correction
1 Shift Value Shifts the image across the page at the interval
specified by SP2-906-2.
When making many copies of an original that contains
vertical lines (such as a table), separation may not
work correctly, then a tailing image will occur (ghosts
of the vertical lines will continue past the bottom of the
table). This SP prevents this problem.
[0.0 ~ 1.0 / 0.0 / 1 mm/step]
2 Interval Changes the interval for the image shift specified by
SP2-906-1.
[1 ~ 10 / 0 / 1 page/step]
907* Line Width Correction
Service
1 Text Mode Adjusts the line width. The value “5” means that line
Tables
width correction is disabled. A number smaller than 5
makes lines thinner. A number bigger than 5 makes
lines thicker.
Thinnest Thickest
0 – 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 9 – 10
[0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
2 Photo Mode [0 ~ 10 / 6 / 1 step]
3 Text/Photo Mode [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
4 Pale Mode [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
5 Generation Mode [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
908 Forced Toner Supply
Forces the toner bottle to supply toner to the toner
supply unit.
Press Execute on the touch panel to start.
During this process, the machine supplies toner until
the toner concentration in the development unit
reaches a standard level. However, if the toner
concentration does not reach a standard level, the
machine supplies toner for 2 minutes maximum.
909* Main Scan Magnification
1 Copy - Short Edge Feed Adjusts the main scan magnification in copy mode
when the machine feeds the paper in the short edge
feed orientation.
[-0.5 ~ 0.5 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]
2 Printer – Short Edge Adjusts the main scan magnification in printer mode
Feed when the machine feeds the paper in the short edge
feed orientation.
[-0.5 ~ 0.5 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]
3 Copy – Long Edge Feed Adjusts the main scan magnification in copy mode
when the machine feeds the paper in the long edge
feed orientation.
[-0.5 ~ 0.5 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]
4-21

909* 4 Printer – Long Edge Adjusts the main scan magnification in printer mode
Feed when the machine feeds the paper in the long edge
feed orientation.
[-0.5 ~ 0.5 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]
910* Margin Adjustment for By-pass
Adjusts the blank margin at the trailing edge of paper
fed from the by-pass table.
[-9.0 ~ +9.0 / 0.1 mm / 1mm/step]
913* ID Adjustment for Test Pattern
Adjusts the image density level for black pixels on test
pattern printouts (patterns are made with SP2-902)
This SP affects all test patterns except for the
grayscale test patterns.
[0 ~ 15 / 15 / 1/step]
915* Polygon Motor Idling Time
Selects the polygon motor idling time.
If the user sets an original, touches a key, or opens the
platen cover/DF, the polygon motor starts idling to
make a faster first copy. However, with the default (15
s), the motor stops if the user does nothing for 15 s,
and stops 15 s after the end of a job.
If set at “0”, the polygon motor never turns off during
stand-by. However, when the machine goes into
energy saver mode, the polygon motor turns off
regardless of this timer.
[0 = None / 1 = 15 s / 2 = 25 s]
921* Toner Supply Mode
Selects the toner supply mode.
Normally, only use setting 0. Change to 3 temporarily if
the TD sensor is defective. Do not use settings 1 and
2; these are for designer’s use only.
[0 = Sensor 1 / 1 = Sensor 2 / 2 = Fixed 1 / 3 = Fixed
2]
922* Toner Supply Time
Adjusts the toner supply motor on time for sensor
supply mode.
This SP is effective only when SP2-921 is “0” or “1”.
Increasing this value increases the toner supply motor
on time. So, use a high value if the user tends to make
lots of copies that have a high proportion of black.
[0.1 ~ 5.0 / 0.6 / 0.1 s/step]
923* Toner Recovery Time
Adjusts the toner supply motor on time during recovery
from toner near-end/end.
This SP is effective only when SP2-921 is “0”, “1”, or
“2”.
Note that toner recovery is done in a 3-second cycle.
So, the input value should be a multiple of 3 (e.g. 3, 6
,9). See “Toner Density Control” for more details.
[3 ~ 60 / 30 / 1 s/step]
4-22

925* Toner Supply Rate
Adjusts the toner supply rate for fixed toner supply
mode.
This SP is effective only when SP2-921 is “2” or “3”.
Increasing this value increases the toner supply motor
on time. So, use a high value if the user tends to make
lots of copies that have a high proportion of black. See
“Toner Density Control” for more details.
0: t 4: 12t
1: 2t 5: 16t
2: 4t 6: On continuously
3: 8t 7: 0 s
t: 200 ms
[0 ~ 7 / 0 / 1/step]
926* Standard Vt
Adjusts Vts (Vt for a new PCU). The TD sensor output
is adjusted to this value during the TD sensor initial
setting process.
Service
Tables
This SP is effective only when SP2-921 is “0”, “1”, or
“2”.
Do not change this value.
[0.00 ~ 5.00 / 2.50 / 0.01 V/step]
927* ID Sensor Control
Selects whether the ID sensor is used or not for toner
density control.
If this value is “0”, dirty background may occur after the
machine has not been used for a long time.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
928* Toner End Clear
Clears the toner end condition.
Press Execute on the touch panel to clear the toner
end condition without adding new toner.
If press Execute, the following are cleared.
• Toner end indicator (goes out)
• Toner near-end counter
• Toner near-end level
When making a lot of copies after changing this setting
to “1”, the carrier may be attracted to the drum when
the toner runs out, which may damage the drum.
929* Vref
1 Upper Limit Adjusts the upper limit for Vref.
[0.00 ~ 5.00 / 3.10 / 0.01 V/step]
2 Lower Limit Adjusts the lower limit for Vref.
[0.00 ~ 5.00 / 1.40 / 0.01 V/step]
930* TD Sensor Manual Setting
Adjusts the TD sensor output. DFU
[0.5 ~ 3.5 / 0.0V / 1V/step]
931* TD (V/wt%) Setting
Adjusts the TD sensor sensitivity (coefficient: S) for
toner density control. DFU
[0.01 ~ 1.50 / 0.4 / 0.1/step]
4-23

932* Toner Density Control Level Adjustment
Adjusts the toner density control threshold level.
[0 = Normal / 1 = Dark / 2 = Light / 3 = Darker / 4 =
Lighter]
Use this SP when you want to adjust the image
density.
933* ID Sensor Control Coefficient
Adjusts the ID sensor control coefficient. DFU
[5 ~ 30 / 10 / 1/step]
934* ID Sensor PWM Setting
1 Display Displays the PWM of the ID Sensor LED.
2 PWM Upper Limit Adjusts the upper limit of the PWM for the ID sensor
LED. DFU
[0 ~ 999 / 0 / 1/step]
3 PWM Upper Limit Corrects the upper limit of the PWM for the ID sensor
Correction LED. DFU
[0 ~ 999 / 0 / 1/step]
935 ID Sensor Initialization
Performs the ID sensor initial setting.
Press Execute on the touch panel to start. Perform this
setting after replacing or cleaning the ID sensor.
936* ID Sensor Pattern Size
Selects the ID sensor pattern size in the main scan
direction.
Set to 1 if white spots or black spots appear on prints.
The ID sensor pattern is 290 mm wide, and when this
is cleaned off, dirt is removed also.
[0 = 20 mm / 1 = 290 mm]
992* Copies After TD Sensor Error
Selects the number of copies that can be made after a
TD sensor error has been detected. When the machine
copies this amount, an SC condition will occur.
If the optional fax unit is installed, the SC condition
occurs immediately regardless of the number of prints
(this is because the sender of the fax cannot check the
image quality of the printout).
[0 = 100 copies / 1 = 200 copies]
994* Vts Limitation
1 Upper Limit (Factory) DFU
2 Lower Limit (Factory) DFU
995* ID Sensor Detection Interval
1 Warming-up If the machine starts warming-up after this time has
passed since entering energy saver mode or auto off
mode, the machine makes an ID sensor pattern.
If this value is greater, there is a greater chance that
background will become dirty.
[0 ~ 999 / 30 / 1 minute/step]
955* 2 Number of Page The machine makes an ID sensor pattern after the
specified number of prints has been made. 0 = this
feature is disabled.
[0 ~ 999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
4-24

996* Transfer Roller Cleaning
Selects whether the transfer roller is cleaned before
each copy job.
Set this to ‘1’ when dirty background appears on the
reverse side of the first page of a copy job. However,
the first copy time will be longer.
If this SP is at 0, the transfer roller is never cleaned.
See ‘Detailed Section Descriptions – Transfer Roller
Cleaning” for more details.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
997* Vts Setting (Factory) DFU
998* PCU Reverse Rotation Time
1 Wait Time Adjusts the waiting time for starting to rotate the drum
in reverse after the end of each job.
The wait time calculation formula is as follows.
This value x 30 ms. 0: Reverses immediately after the
end of the job (no waiting)
[0 ~ 99 / 20 / 1/step]
2 Reverse Time Adjusts the drum reverse rotation time.
Service
Tables
The reverse rotation time calculation formula is as
follows.
This value x 30 ms. 0: No reverse at end of job
[0 ~ 99 / 1 / 1/step]
999* Toner Control Data Display
Displays the toner density control data on the debug
monitor. DFU
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
SP4-XXX: Scanner
008* Main Scan Magnification (Scanner)
Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction for
scanning.
entering the value. The specification is ± 1%. See
details.
[–0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1% step]
009* Sub Scan Magnification (Scanner)
Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for
scanning.
entering the value. The specification is ± 1%. See
details.
[–0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1% step]
4-25

010* Leading Edge Registration (Scanner)
Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning in
platen mode.
(–): The image moves in the direction of the leading
edge.
entering the value. The specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm.
See “Replacement and Adjustment – Copy
Adjustment” for details.
[–0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step]
011* Side-to-side Registration (Scanner)
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in
platen mode.
(–): The image disappears at the left side.
(+): The image appears.
entering the value. The specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm.
See “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy Adjustment”
for details.
[–4.6 ~ +4.6 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step]
012* Scanner Erase Margin
1 Leading Edge Adjusts the erase margin at each side for scanning.
2 Trailing Edge Do not adjust this unless the user wishes to have a
3 Right Side scanner margin that is greater than the printer margin.
4 Left Side [0 ~ 9.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
013 Scanner Free Run
Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp
on.
Press ON on the touch panel to start this feature.
Press the & (Clear/Stop) key to stop.
015* White Plate Scanning
1 Start Position Adjusts the scanning start position on the white plate
for auto shading.
The default is 10.5 mm from the leading edge. The
setting specifies how far scanning starts from the
default position.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2 Scanning Area Adjusts the width of the area on the white plate (in the
sub scan direction) that is scanned for auto shading.
The default is 4.76 mm. The current setting specifies
the difference from this default.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
301 APS Data Display
Displays the status of the APS sensors and platen/DF
cover sensor (☛ 4.2.9).
4-26

303* APS Small Size Original
Selects whether the copier determines that the original
is A5 size when the APS sensor cannot detect the
size.
If “A5 lengthwise” is selected, paper sizes that cannot
be detected by the APS sensors are regarded as A5
lengthwise. If “Not detected” is selected, “Cannot
detect original size” will be displayed.
[0 = No (Not detected) / 1 = Yes (A5 lengthwise)]
305* Original Size Detection
Selects whether the machine determines that the
original is A4/LT, or 8K/16K.
8K/16K is not available for USA models.
[0 = Normal (LT for USA models, A4 for Europe/Asia
models)
1 = Reversed [A4 for USA models, LT for Europe/Asia
models]
2 = 8K/16K]
417 IPU Test Pattern
Prints test patterns from the IPU video data outputs.
Service
Tables
0. No Print
1. Vertical Line - 1 dot
2. Vertical Line - 2 dot
3. Horizontal Line - 1 dot
4. Horizontal Line - 2 dot
5. Alternating Dot Pattern
6. Grid Pattern - 1 dot
7. Vertical Bands
8. Grayscale – Horizontal (8 level)
9. Grayscale – Vertical (8 level)
10.Grayscale – 16 level
11.Cross Pattern
12.Slant Pattern
13.Patch Pattern (256 level)
14 Patch Pattern (64 level)
15.Trimming Area
16.Frequency characteristics - Vertical
15.Frequency characteristics - Horizontal
Change to the copy mode display by pressing the )
(Interrupt) key, then print the test pattern.
428 SBU Auto Adjustment
Performs the auto scanner adjustment.
Using this SP mode after replacing the white plate or
erasing the memory on the controller board. See
“Replacement and Adjustment – Copy Image
Adjustments - Standard White Density Adjustment” for
details on how to do this.
Press Execute on the touch panel to start.
4-27

901 SBU Adjustment
1* Gain - EVEN Checks the difference value of the black level for the
EVEN channel after adjusting the black level at power-
up. DFU
However, after doing a memory all clear (SP5-801),
use it to re-input the previous value.
[0 ~ 255 / 40 / 1/step]
2* Gain - ODD Checks the difference value of the black level for the
ODD channel after adjusting the black level at power-
up. DFU.
[0 ~ 255 / 40 / 1/step]
3 DC Cont - EVEN Adjusts the coefficient of the D/A converter for the
AGC gain curve for DC cont for the EVEN channel.
DFU
[0 ~255 / 25 / 1/step]
901 4 DC Cont - ODD Adjusts the coefficient of the D/A converter for the
AGC gain curve for DC cont for the ODD channel.
DFU.
[0 ~255 / 25 / 1/step]
7 Current Value Adjusts the coefficient of the D/A converter for the
AGC gain curve for scanning the white plate.
DFU.
[0 ~255 / 147 / 1/step]
902 Exposure Lamp ON
Turns on the exposure lamp.
Press ON on the touch panel to turn on the lamp.
Press OFF to turn off the lamp.
903* Image Quality Adjustment
1 Text : 25% ~ 34% This adjustment is only effective for the “Custom
Setting” original type.
Adjusts the image quality in Text mode.
A larger number increases contrast and sharpens the
image but moiré may appear.
A smaller number reduces contrast and moiré but the
line may become narrower.
[0 ~ 10 / 4 / 1 step]
2 Text : 35% ~ 66% [0 ~ 10 / 3 / 1 step]
3 Text : 67% ~ 141% [0 ~ 10 / 4 / 1/step]
4 Text : 142% ~ 400% [0 ~ 10 / 4 / 1/step]
5 Photo : 25% ~ 34% This adjustment is only effective for the “Custom
Adjusts the image quality in Photo mode.
0 ~ 6 are for a glossy photo image (error diffusion)
7 ~ 20 are for a printed photo image (dithering)
If copy quality is not satisfactory, try another setting
(trial and error)
[0 ~ 20 / 11 / 1/step]
4-28

903* 6 Photo : 35% ~ 66% [0 ~ 20 / 11 / 1/step]
7 Photo : 67% ~ 141% [0 ~ 20 / 11 / 1/step]
8 Photo : 142% ~ 400% [0 ~ 20 / 11 / 1/step]
9 Text/Photo : This adjustment is only effective for the “Custom
25% ~ 34% Setting” original type.
Adjusts the image quality in Text/Photo mode.
[0 ~ 10 / 3 / 1 step]
10 Text/Photo : [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
35% ~ 66%
11 Text/Photo : [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
67% ~ 141%
12 Text/Photo : [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
142% ~ 400%
13 Pale : 25% ~ 34% This adjustment is only effective for the “Custom
Service
Adjusts the image quality in Pale mode.
Tables
A larger number increase the number of gradations in
low contrast areas.
[0 ~ 10 / 3 / 1 step]
14 Pale : 35% ~ 66% [0 ~ 10 / 3 / 1 step]
15 Pale : 67% ~ 141% [0 ~ 10 / 3 / 1 step]
16 Pale : 142% ~ 400% [0 ~ 10 / 3 / 1 step]
17 Generation : This adjustment is only effective for the “Custom
25% ~ 34% Setting” original type.
Adjusts the image quality in Generation mode.
[0 ~ 10 / 3 / 1 step]
18 Generation : [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
35% ~ 66%
19 Generation : [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
67% ~ 141%
20 Generation : [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
142% ~ 400%
904* Independent Dot Erase
1 Text This adjustment is only effective for the “Custom
With a larger SP setting, more dots are detected as
independent dots and erased. However, dots in mesh-
like images may be detected as independent dots
mistakenly. If “0” is selected, independent dot erase is
disabled.
[0 ~ 10 / 0 / 1 step]
2 Photo [0 ~ 10 / 0 / 1 step]
3 Text/Photo [0 ~ 10 / 0 / 1 step]
4 Pale [0 ~ 10 / 0 / 1 step]
5 Generation [0 ~ 10 / 3 / 1 step]
4-29

Background Erase
6 Text This adjustment is only effective for the “Custom
A larger number reduces dirty background. If “0” is
selected, background erase is disabled.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 step]
7 Photo [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 step]
8 Text/Photo [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 step]
9 Pale [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 step]
10 Generation [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 step]
Gamma Selection
904* 11 Text This adjustment is only effective for the “Custom
Selects the gamma table for each original type.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Standard gamma table
1: This gamma table reduces the background of the
original and gives sharp characters.
2: The gamma table increases the number of
gradations in high-density areas.
12 Photo [0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
13 Text/Photo [0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
14 Pale [0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
15 Generation [0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
905* Image Data Path
Selects one of the following video data outputs which
will be used for printing. DFU
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Normal
1: After black level correction
2: After shading correction without black level
correction
3: Shading data
907* Fax 25%, 50% Determines whether 25% and 50% reduction is
1 Reduction available in fax mode.
[0 = No, 1 = Yes]
2 Outline Level Japanese version only DFU
909* IPU Image Data Path
Selects one of the following image data outputs, which
will be used for printing. DFU
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 step]
Bit 7: Shading
Bit 6: Scanner gamma
Bit 5: Pre-filtering
Bit 4: Magnification
Bit 3: Scanner/Printer Mask
Bit 2: Gradation
Bit 1: Filtering
Bit 0: Printer gamma
4-30

911* HDD Formatting Select the desired SP, then press Execute on the
touch panel to format each HDD partition.
Note: After execution, turn the main power switch off
and on.
1 All Initializes the entire hard disk.
2 Image Files Initializes documents stored in document server mode,
stamp print data, scanner send data, fax send data.
3 NetFiles Initializes network file application thumbnail images.
4 Job Log Initializes job logging data (for Poplar server) DFU
5 Printer Fonts Initializes printer fonts and stored fonts.
9 Debug DFU
920 Scanning (Factory) DFU
930* Sensor Condition

1 Platen Cover sensor Checks the following sensors in the scanner unit.
[0 = Opened, 1 = Closed]
2 Scanner HP Sensor [0 = Opened, 1 = Closed]
Service
Tables
SP5-XXX: Mode
024* mm/inch Selection
Selects whether mm or inches are used in the display.
Note: After selecting the number, you must turn the
main power switch off and on.
Eur./Asia model
[0 = mm / 1 = inch]
American model
[0 = mm / 1 = inch]
104* A3/DLT Double Count
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/11" x
17" paper.
If “Yes” is selected, the total counter (mechanical
counter) and the current user code counter counts up
twice when A3/11" x 17" paper is used.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
106* ADS Level Selection
Selects the image density level that is used in ADS
mode.
[1 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 notch/step]
113* Option Counter Type
Selects the optional counter type.
Japan only DFU
[0 = No, 1 = Key Card1, 2 = Key Card2, 3 = Pre-paid
Card, 4 = Coin lock, 5 = MF key card]
118* Disable Copying DFU
120* Opt. Counter Reset Setting
This SP is for Japan only. Do not change the value.
[0 = Yes / 1 = Stand-by / 2 = None]
4-31

121* Key Counter Up Timing
Determines whether the total counter counts up at
paper feed-in or at paper exit.
[0 = Feed In / 1 = Exit]
127* APS Mode Setting
Selects whether APS mode is selected as the power-
up default.
[0 = Enable / 1 = Disabled]
129* F Paper Size Selection
Selects the “F” paper size.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1 step]
0: 8" x 13"
1: 8.5" x 13"
2: 8.25" x 13"
131* Paper Size Type Selection
Selects the paper size (type) for both originals and
copy paper.
[0~2 / DIP SW setting / 1 step]
0: Japan
1: North America
2: Europe
After changing the setting, turn the copier off and on. If
the paper size of the archive files stored on the HDD is
different, abnormal copies could result. Ask the
customer to restore the archive files.
150* By-Pass Long Paper Mode
Determines whether long paper can be fed from the by-
pass tray.
[0 = Off, 1 = On]
Normally the paper length from the by-pass tray is
limited to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this
SP to 1260 mm.
Note that, with either setting, the image quality can only
be guaranteed for 432 mm.
212* Page Stamp
3 Duplex Printout Determines how horizontal printing is executed during
Right/Left Position duplex printing. Set the upper right corner of the front
side and the upper left corner of the back side so the
starting points for horizontal printing are the same on
both sides DFU.
[–10~+10 / 0 / 1 mm step]
–10: Extreme right
+10: Extreme left
4* Duplex Printout Determines how vertical printing is executed during
High/Low Position duplex printing. Set the upper right corner of the front
side and the upper left corner of the back side so the
starting points for vertical printing are the same on both
sides. DFU
[–10~+10 / 0 / 1 mm step]
–10: Extreme top
+10: Extreme bottom
4-32

302* 2* Set Time Zone Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the
local time zone.
[–1440~+1440 / see below / 1 min./step]
NA: -300 (New York)
EU: +60 (Paris)
Asia: +480 (Hong Kong)
Example: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60
min.)
305* Auto Off Mode
Selects the auto off timer setting range.
When “1” is selected, the auto off timer range will be
wider than the default timer range, and the user can
disable the auto off timer. (In UP mode, the user will be
able to select a time between 0 and 240 minutes.)
When set to “0”, the user cannot set the timer to zero.
[0 = On (Enabled), 1 = Off (Disabled)
401* Restricted Access Control
2 Copy Mode Selects whether restricted access control is done when
(Key counter) using the key counter in copy mode.
Service
If this value is changed, the user tool setting is also
Tables
changed.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
3 Copy Mode Japan only DFU
(Other counters) [0 = No / 1 = Yes]
12 Document Server Selects whether restricted access control is done when
(Key counter) using the key counter in document server mode.
changed.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
13 Document Server Japan only DFU
22 Fax Mode Selects whether restricted access control is done when
(Key counter) using the key counter in fax mode.
changed.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
23 Fax Mode Japan only DFU
32 Scanner Mode Selects whether restricted access control is done when
(Key counter) using the key counter in scanner mode.
changed.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
33 Scanner Mode Japan only DFU
42 Printer Mode Selects whether restricted access control is done when
(Key counter) using the key counter in printer mode.
changed.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
43 Printer Mode Japan only DFU
4-33

501* PM Alarm
1 Interval Sets the PM interval.
The value stored in this SP is used when the value of
SP5-501-2 is “1”.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 k copies/step]
2 Original Alarm Japan only. DFU
Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans
is enabled or not.
If this is “1”, the PM alarm function is enabled.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
504* Jam Alarm Setting
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level
(document misfeeds are not included).
Japan only DFU
[0~3 / 3 / 1 step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
505* Error Alarm Setting
Sets the error alarm level. Japan only DFU
[0~255 / 50 / 100 copies per step]
507* Consumable Alarm
1 Paper Switches the control call on/off for the paper supply.
Japan only DFU
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm.
1: Sets the alarm to sound for the specified number
transfer sheets for each paper size (A3, A4, B4, B5,
DLT, LG, LT, HLT)
2 Staple Switches the control call on/off for the stapler installed
in the finisher. Japan only DFU
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm
1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used.
3 Toner Switches the control call on/off for the toner end.
Japan only DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select “1” the alarm will sound when the copier
detects toner end.
128* Others The “Paper Supply Call Level: nn” SPs specify the
132* A3 paper control call interval for the referenced paper
133* A4 sizes.
Japan only DFU
134* A5
[00250 ~ 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
141* B4
142* B5
160* DLT
164* LG
166* LT
172* HLT
4-34

508* CC Call
1 Remain of Jam Switches the control call on/off for an unattended jam.
(Unattended Jam) Japan only DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select “1”, the alarm sound if a jam is left
unattended for 15 minutes.
2 Continuous Jam Switches the control call on/off for the occurrence of
Occurrence consecutive jams. Japan only DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select “1”, the alarm will sound if 5 consecutive
jams occur in the copier.
3 Continuous Door Open Switches the control call on/off for the cover open
alarm. Japan only DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select “1”, the alarm will sound if the door
remains open for 15 minutes.
4 New CC Call Mode Selects whether or not the new CC call.
Japan only DFU
0: Previous Mode, 1: New Mode
Service
11 Time for Remain of This SP is effective when the value of SP5-508-4 is “1”.
Tables
Jam Japan only DFU
[3 ~ 30 / 10 / 1 min/step]
12 Number of continuos This SP is effective when the value of SP5-508-4 is “1”.
Jam Japan only DFU
[2 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 time/step]
13 Time of Continuous This SP is effective when the value of SP5-508-4 is “1”.
Door Open Japan only DFU
[3 ~ 30 / 10 / 1 min/step]
21 Remain of Jam Mode This SP is effective when the value of SP5-508-4 is “1”.
(Unattended Jam) Japan only DFU
0: Auto Call, 1: Alarm
22 Continuous Jam This SP is effective when the value of SP5-508-4 is “1”.
Occurrence Mode Japan only DFU
23 Continuous Door Open This SP is effective when the value of SP5-508-4 is “1”.
Mode Japan only DFU
801 Memory All Clear Resets all correction data for process control and all
software counters, and returns all modes and
adjustments to their default values. (☛ 4.2.7).
To execute, hold down # for over 3 seconds, and then
turn the copier off and on again.
Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after
the copier has malfunctioned due to a damaged
NVRAM.
1 All modules Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below.
2 Engine Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
processing settings.
3 SCS (System Control Initializes default system settings, CSS settings,
Service)/SRAM operation display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
SCS: System Control Service
4-35

801 4 IMH (Image Memory Initializes the registration setting for the image
Handler) memory handler.
5 MCS (Memory Control Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored
Service) documents.
6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and the off-hook
timer.
8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,
the printer SP bit switches, and printer CSS counter.
9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and
all the scanner SP modes.
10 Network application Deletes the network file application management
files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
11 NCS (Network Control Initializes the system defaults and interface settings
Service) (IP addresses also), SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET
settings.
12 R-FAX Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
802 Free Run
Performs a free run for both the scanner and the
printer.
After selecting “1”, press “OK” or the ' key twice to
start this feature. Press the & (Clear/Stop) key to stop.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
803 Input Check
Displays signals received from sensors and switches.
Press the " (Clear Modes) key to exit the program.
(☛ 4.2.4)
804 Output Check
Turns on electrical components individually for test
purposes. (☛ 4.2.5)
807* Option Connection Check
1 ARDF Checks the connectors to the optional peripheral
2 Bank (Paper Tray Unit) devices. Execution will return either a “1” or “0”:
LCT 1: Device connected correctly.
3
0: Device not connected correctly.
4 Finisher (1000-sheet,
Two-Tray finisher)
810 SC Code Reset
1 Fusing SC Resets all level A service call conditions, such as fusing
errors. DFU
To clear the service call, touch “Execute” on the LCD,
then turn the main power switch off/on.
811 Serial Number Input
Use to input the machine serial number. (This is
normally done at the factory.)
This serial number will be printed on the SMC report.
4-36

812* Telephone Number
1 Service Telephone Use this to input the telephone number of the service
representative (this is displayed when a service call
condition occurs).
Press the ! key if you need to input a pause (–).
Press the & (Clear/Stop) key to delete the telephone
number.
2 Facsimile Use this to input the fax number which will be printed
on the user counter report.
number.
3 Consumable Use this to input the telephone number that the
customer uses to order toner (this is displayed in the
inquiry menu of UP mode).
number.
4 Sales Telephone Use this to input the telephone number of the sales
representative (this is displayed in the inquiry menu of
Service
Tables
UP mode).
number.
816* CSS Function
This SP is for Japan only. DFU.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
821 CSS-PI Device Code
This SP is for Japan only. DFU.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
824 NVRAM Data Upload
Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for
counters and the serial number) from the NVRAM on
the control board to a flash memory card. (☛ 4.2.8)
While using this SP mode, always keep the front cover
open. This prevents a software module accessing the
NVRAM during the upload.
825 NVRAM Data Download
Downloads the content of a flash memory card to the
NVRAM on the control board. (☛ 4.2.8 )
While using this SP mode, always keep the front cover
open. This prevents a software module accessing the
NVRAM during the download.
After executing this SP, switch the copier off and on.
828* Network Setting
25* Software Switch Sets the reference for the network software.
[00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
26* Network Operation Sets the TCP operation mode for the network.
Mode Setting [00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
27* Network Syslog Server Sets the syslog server address for the network.
Address Setting [00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 7F000001h / 1 hex unit step]
4-37

828* 28* Network Time Server Sets the time server address for the network.
Address Setting [00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
29* Network DNS Server Sets the DNS server address for the network.
Address Setting [00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
30* Network Directprint Port Sets the directprint port number for the network.
Number Setting [1024~65535 / 9100 / 1 step]
31* Network IPP Timeout Sets the IPP timeout for the network.
Setting [30~65535 / 900 / 1 step]
32 Network IPX Address Sets the IPX Address.
Setting (NetWare)
33* Network Remote Sets the remote printer number for the network.
Printer Number Setting [0~254 / 0 / 1 step]
(NetWare)
34* Network Software Sets the software switch for the network.
Switch Setting [0000~FFFFh / 0003h / 1 hex unit step]
(NetWare)
35* Network Transport Sets the transport protocol of the print server for the
Protocol of Print Server network.
Setting (NetWare) 0000h: TCP & IPX
0100h: TCP& IPX (Priority: IPX)
0102h: TCP Only (Priority: TCP)
0001h: IPX Only
36 Network AppleTalk Sets the AppleTalk module for the network. DFU
Module Setting 2: EtherTalk Phase2
37 Network NetNo Setting Sets the NetNo of the AppleTalk network.
(AppleTalk)
38 Network Object Name Sets the object name of the AppleTalk network.
Setting (AppleTalk)
39* Network AppleTalk Sets the AppleTalk type for the network.
Type Setting
40 Network Working Zone Sets the AppleTalk working zone for the network.
Setting (AppleTalk)
47* Network Job Analysis Sets the Centronics job analysis timeout for the
Timeout Setting network.
(Centronics) [0~43200 s / 3 s / 1 sec. step]
48* Network Job Timeout Sets the Centronics job timeout for the network.
Setting (Centronics) [0~43200 s / 0 s / 1 sec. step]
49* Network Noise Cancel Sets the noise cancel level for the network.
Setting (Centronics) [4~7 / 4 / 1 clock per step]
50* Network 1284 Switches Centronics IEEE1284 compatibility on/off for
Compatibility Setting the network.
(Centronics) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Selecting “0” disables bi-directional data transmission.
51* Network Data Transfer Sets the Centronics transfer speed for the network.
Speed Setting 0: SLOW, 1: FAST
(Centronics) If you select “0” there will be a 120 µs delay from the
STP signal to the data transfer. (With 1: FAST there is
no delay.)
52* Network ECP Setting Switches the ECP setting for Centronics off/on.
(Centronics) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
With “1” selected, SP5-828-050 must be enabled for
1284 mode compatibility.
4-38

828* 53* Network Transmission Selects the Ethernet transmission speed.
Speed Setting [0x00~0x03 / 0x00 / 0x01 step]
Bit1 Bit2 Speed
0 0 Auto Sense
0 1 10Base-T
1 0 100Base-Tx
1 1 Auto
833* Job Log Transfer On/Off Setting
7 Switches the job log transfer on/off for Poplar server.
DFU
0: Off (disable), 1: On (enable)
834 Enable Operation Panel Image Enables and disables the operation panel read (dump)
Settings feature. After powering on the machine, set this option
to 1 to enable this feature.
0: Off (disable), 1: On (enable) DFU
To reset the machine to 0, the machine must be turned
off and on again. Selecting 0 for this option without
cycling the power off and on does not restore the
default setting (0).
Service
Tables
841* Consumable Name
Inputs the toner type (this is displayed in the inquiry
menu of UP mode).
907* Plug & Play Setting
Sets the brand name and the production name for
Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored in
NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective or has been
replaced, these names should be registered again.
To set the plug and play model name, enter the model
number, and then press '.
908* LCT Paper Size
Selects the paper size for the LCT.
Use this SP after changing the paper size in the
optional LCT (i.e., after changing the side plate position
for the LCT).
[0 = A4 (Eur./Asia model) / 1 = LT (American model)]
912* PCU Alarm Setting
1 Display Selects whether the PCU alarm message (Change
Photoconductor Unit) blinks when the PCU alarm
interval expires.
When installing the machine, if the customer requires
that the PCU alarm message blink, select “1”. If set to
“0”, there will be no message.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
2 Interval Sets the PCU alarm interval.
When the machine reaches this value, the PCU alarm
will be displayed on the LCD to inform the user. Only
used if SP5-912-1 is at “1”.
[1 ~ 255 / 60 / 1 k copies/step]
4-39

914* Application Counter Display
1 Printer Selects whether the total counters for printer mode
2 Copy and/or copy mode are displayed in user tool mode.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
915* Mechanical Counter Detection
Checks whether the mechanical counter inside the
inner cover is connected or not.
Display:
0: Not detected
1: Detected
2: Unknown
918* A3/DLT Counter Display
Displays the counter, which counts A3/DLT as double.
0 = No, 1 = Yes
The A3/DLT counter counts up twice when an A3 or
DLT sheet is fed out.
921* Fan Control Time
Adjusts the exhaust fan motor control time.
1. After the machine has entered energy saver mode
or stand-by mode, the machine slows the fan
speed after this time runs out.
2. After the machine has entered the auto off mode or
an error condition, the machine stops the fan after
this time runs out.
[30 ~ 120 / 30 s / 1 s/step]
923* Border Erase Area Change
Toggles between two settings that affect the
appearance of the pages for border removal and
printed facing pages: (1) Using the original area as the
allotted area, or (2) Using only the copy paper as the
allotted area.
[0 = Original base, 1 = Copy base]
0: Original area used as base
1: Copy used as the base
958* Feed Clutch Start Timing Adjustment
Adjusts the clutch timing to optimize the intervals
between fed sheets to reduce jams in the feed unit.
[35 ~ 57.5 / 42.5 / 2.5mm]
970* Debug Serial Output
DFU
[0 = No, 1 = Yes]
972 Test Suite Setting
1* GWIPC Logging DFU
[0 = Off, 1 = On]
3* Key Monitor DFU
[0 = Off, 1 = On]
4 Key Monitor - Record DFU
[0 = Off, 1 = On]
5 Key Monitor - Play DFU
[0 = Off, 1 = On]
6* Key Monitor – Play DFU
Check [0 = Off, 1 = On]
4-40

972 7* Key Monitor – Min. DFU
Time [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 0.1 s/step]
8* Key Monitor – Max DFU
Time [0 ~ 255 / 100 / 0.1 s/step]
9 Key Monitor – Play DFU
Speed [0.01 ~ 100 / 100 / 0.01 s/step]
10 Key Monitor – Repeat DFU
Time [1 ~ 65535 / 1 / 1 step]
11 Key Monitor – Log No. DFU
12 Key Monitor – Play File DFU
No.
13 Key Monitor File No. DFU
974* Cherry Server Selection
Switches writing between the Scan Router V2 Lite
application provided and the optional full version.
0: Lite, 1: Full
SMC Printing
1 All (Data List) Prints all of the system parameter lists for the item
2 SP (Mode Data List) selected. (☛ 4.2.6) Input the number for the item that
Service
Tables
3 User Program you want to print, then press “Execute” on the touch
panel.
4 Logging Data
990
5 Diagnosis Report
7 NIB Summary
21 Copier User Program
22 Scanner SP
23 Scanner User Program
SP6-XXX: Peripherals
006* ADF Registration
1 Side-to-Side Adjusts the registration in ADF mode.
Use the ! key to toggle between + and - before
entering the value. See “Replacement and Adjustment
- Copy Adjustment” for details.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2 Leading Edge [–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
3 Trailing Edge Erase Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin in ADF mode.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / –1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4 Side-to-Side/Rear Adjusts the side-to-side registration on the rear side of
the original in ADF mode.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4-41

006* 5 Sub Scan Magnification Adjusts the sub scan magnification in ADF mode.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 % step]
6 Skew Correction Selects whether or not skew correction is done in ADF
mode.
0 = Off, 1 = On
7 Original Buckle Adjusts the amount of original buckle at the ARDF
Adjustment registration roller when the ARDF feeds the rear side
of the original.
This SP is effective only when SP6-006-6 is at “1”.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 ADF Input Check
Displays the signals received from sensors and
switches of the ARDF.( ☛ 4.2.4)
008 ADF Output Check
Switches on each electrical component (ARDF motor,
solenoid, etc.) of the ARDF for testing. (☛ 4.2.5)
Press # to switch on or $ to switch off.
009 ADF Free Run
Performs an ARDF free run in duplex mode. Press #
to start.
1: To Start, 0: To cancel
This is a general free run controlled from the copier.
For more detailed free run modes, see the ARDF
manual.
010* Stamp Position Adjustment
Adjusts the stamp position in the sub-scan direction in
fax mode.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
016* ADF Original Size Detection
Selects whether the machine determines that the
original is A4/LT, or 8K/16K when the APS sensor in
the ADF does not detect the original size.
8K/16K is not available for 115V machines.
[0 = Normal (LT for USA models, A4 for Europe/Asia
models)
1 = Reversed [A4 for USA models, LT for Europe/Asia
models]
2 = 8K/16K]
117 Finisher Input Check

Displays the signals received from sensors and
switches in the finisher. ( ☛ 4.2.4)
118 Finisher Output Check
Switches on each electrical component of the finisher
for testing. (☛ 4.2.5)
Press # to switch on or $ to switch off.
4-42

901 ADF APS Data Display
Displays the status of the original size sensors in the
ADF. (☛ 4.2.10)
910* ADF Shading Interval Time
Adjusts the interval for shading processing in DF
mode.
Light and heat may affect the scanner response. If
copy quality indicates that white level is drifting during
a DF copy job, reduce this setting.
[0 ~ 120 / 20s / 1s/step]
920 ADF Loop Back Test
1 DF GATE DFU
0 = Gate, 1 = Asart
2 DF TXD Break DFU
0 = Off, 1 = On
3 Serial Communication DFU
0 = NG, 1 = OK
4 Original Set DFU
0 = Off, 1 = On
Service
Tables
5 Serial Check DFU
925 Finisher/Duplex loop Back Test
1 Loop Back Test DFU
2 Result DFU
SP7-XXX: Data Log

001* Main Motor Operation Time
The number of prints and drive time for drum
revolutions can be obtained by counting the main
motor revolution time. If the amount of the time
required for the drum to revolve to print 1 copy
increases, this data combined with the number of
copies can be used to analyze problems and could be
useful for future product development.
Display: 00000000~99999999 min.
002* Total Original Counter
1 All Modes Select a number to display the total original count
2 Copier (number of originals fed) for the selected item.
3 Fax
4 Document Box
5 Scanner
6 Others
003* Total Print Counter
1 All Modes Select a number to display the total print count for the
2 Copier selected item.
3 Fax
4-43

003* 4 Printer Select a number to display the total print count for the
5 Others selected item.
006* C/O, P/O Counters
1 C/O Counter Displays the number of copies per original when
2 P/O Counter making more than 10 copies.
For example, if you make 15 copies of a 3 page
original document, for a total of 45 sheets, then the
counter would be 15 (5 copies counted from 11 to 15 x
3 originals). No count will be returned for 1~10 copies
of an original.
007* Other Counter
1 Duplex Counter Displays the count total for the selected item.
2 A3/DLT Counter
3 Staple Counter
4 Scan Counter
101* Copy Counter - Paper Size
5 A4 H (Sideways) Displays the total number of copies by paper size.
6 A5 H (Sideways)
14 B5 H (Sideways)
38 LT H (Sideways)
44 HLT H (Sideways)
132 A3 V (Lengthwise)
141 B4 V (Lengthwise)
160 DLT V (Lengthwise)
164 LG V (Lengthwise)
166 LT V (Lengthwise)
172 HLT V (Lengthwise)
255 Others
201* Total Scan Counter
Displays the total number of scanned originals.
204* Copy Counter - Paper Tray
1 1st Displays the total number of copies fed from each
2 2nd paper feed station.
3 3rd
4 4th
5 LCT
6 By-pass
205* Total ADF Counter
Displays the total number of originals fed by the ADF.
206* Staple Counter
1 Normal Display the total number of staples fired.
2 Booklet DFU
209* Punch Counter
Displays the total times the punch has fired. DFU
4-44

301* Copy Counter - Mag.
1 25% ~ 49% Displays the total number of copies by reproduction
2 50% ~ 99% ratio and magnification.
3 Full Size
4 101% ~ 200%
5 201% ~ 400%
6 Direct Mag.
7 Direct Size Mag.
8 Auto Reduce/Enlarge
304* Copy Counter - Copy Mode
1 Text Mode Displays the total number of copies by copy mode.
2 Text/Photo Mode
3 Photo Mode
4 Generation Mode
5 Pale Mode
6 Punch
7 Repeat
8 Sort
Service
Tables
9 Staple
10 Series
11 Erase
12 Duplex
13 ADF
14 Double Copy
15 Duplex Original
16 Interrupt Copy
17 Combine 1 Side
18 Combine 2 Side
19 Booklet
20 Magazine
21 Batch
22 SADF
23 Mixed Sizes
24 Stamp
25 Cover Page/Chapter
Page
26 Slip Sheet
305* Copy Counter – Set Number
1 1 to 1 Displays the total number of prints for multiple copy
2 1 to 2~5 jobs.
3 1 to 6~10
4 1 to 11~20
5 1 to 21~50
6 1 to 51~100
7 1 to 101~300
8 1 to 301~ Over
4-45

306* Job Counter – Copy Mode
1 Sort Displays the total number of prints based on the job
2 Staple mode.
3 Punch
4 Reserve Copy
5 Check Copy
320* Document Server - Scanning Counter
Displays the original count stored on the document
server.
321* Document Server: Each Size of Originals
4 A3 Displays the number of originals by paper size
5 A4 scanned at the copy server.
6 A5
13 B4
14 B5
32 DLT
36 LG
38 LT
44 HLT
128 Others
323* Document Server: Each Size of Printouts
5 A4 (S) Displays the number of prints by paper size.
6 A5 (S)
14 B5 (S)
38 LT (S)
44 HLT (S)
128 Other
132 A3 (L)
133 A4 (L)
134 A5 (L)
141 B4 (L)
142 B5 (L)
160 DLT (L)
164 LG (L)
166 LT (L)
172 HLT (L)
324* Document Server - Print Job Counter
1 Duplex Displays the number of jobs classed by job content.
2 Sort
3 Staple
4 Punch
324* 5 Check Copy Displays the number of jobs classed by job content.
6 Print 1st Page
325* Document Server: Job Counter – Page Number
1 1-page Displays the number of print jobs classed by size of
2 2-pages the job.
3 3~5 pages
4 6~10 pages
5 over 11 pages
4-46

326* Document Server: Job Counter – File Number
1 1 file Displays the number of print jobs classed by the
2 2~5 files number of files.
3 6~10 files
4 over 11 files
327* Document Server: Job Counter – Set Number
1 1 to 1 Displays the number of print jobs classed by the set
2 1 to 2~5 sizes.
3 1 to 6~10
4 1 to 11~20
5 1 to 21~50
6 1 to 51~100
7 1 to 101~300
8 1 to 301~ over
328* Document Server: Print Counter – Print Mode
6 Punch Displays the number of prints by mode.
8 Sort
9 Staple
Service
Tables
12 Duplex
19 Booklet
20 Magazine
24 Stamp
25 Cover/Chapter Page
26 Slip Sheet
401* Total SC Counter
Displays the total number of service calls that have
occurred.
403* SC History
1 Latest Displays the most recent 10 service calls.
2 Latest 1
3 Latest 2
4 Latest 3
5 Latest 4
6 Latest 5
7 Latest 6
8 Latest 7
9 Latest 8
10 Latest 9
502* Total Paper Jam Counter
Displays the total number of paper jams.
503* Total Original Jam Counter

Displays the total number of original jams.
4-47

504* Total Jams by Location
Paper Late Paper Lag Displays the total number of paper jams by location.
Error No. Error No. A “Paper Late” error occurs when the paper fails to
activate the sensor at the precise time. A “Paper Lag”
paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the
sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
1 At power on
3 Upper relay sensor
4 Lower relay sensor
5 Vertical transport sensor (optional bank)
6 Relay sensor (optional LCT)
11 Registration sensor
12 62 Paper exit sensor
13 63 Bridge relay sensor
14 64 Bridge exit sensor
15 65 Duplex entrance sensor
16 66 Duplex exit sensor
17 67 1 bin tray exit sensor
20 Finisher entrance sensor
21 Finisher shift tray exit sensor
23 Finisher staple tray paper sensor
24 Finisher stack feed-out belt HP sensor
By error
26 Finisher paper taking out
27 Finisher drive error
28 Finisher tray lift error
29 Finisher jogger drive error
30 Finisher tray shift drive error
31 Finisher stapler error
32 Finisher stack-feed out error
33 Finisher feed out error
34 Finisher no response
505* Total Original Jam by Location

Displays the total number of original jams by location.
These jams occur when the original does not activate
the sensors.
A “Paper Late” error occurs when the paper fails to
activate the sensor at the precise time. A “Paper Lag”
paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the
sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
1 At power on
Paper Late Paper Lag
Error No. Error No.
5 55 Registration Sensor
6 56 Relay Sensor
7 57 Inverter Sensor
4-48

506* Jam Count by Copy Size
5 A4 H (Sideways) Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size.
6 A5 H (Sideways)
14 B5 H (Sideways)
38 LT H (Sideways)
44 HLT H (Sideways)
160 DLT V (Lengthwise)
164 LG V (Lengthwise)
166 LT V (Lengthwise)
172 HLT V (Lengthwise)
255 Others
507* Copy Jam History
1 Last Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10
Service
Tables
2 Last 1 jams)
3 Last 2 Sample Display:
4 Last 3 CODE: 007
5 Last 4 SIZE: 05h
6 Last 5 TOTAL: 0000334
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
7 Last 6
where:
8 Last 7
CODE is the SP7-504-*** number (see above.
9 Last 8
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
10 Last 9 TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7-003)
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF
508* Original Jam History
1 Last Displays the original jam history (the most recent 10
2 Last 1 jams.
3 Last 2 Sample Display:
4 Last 3 CODE: 007
5 Last 4 SIZE: 05h
6 Last 5 TOTAL: 0000334
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
7 Last 6
where:
8 Last 7
CODE is the SP7-505-*** number (see above.
9 Last 8
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
10 Last 9 TOTAL is the total error count (SP7-003-001)
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
4-49

801 ROM No./Firmware Version
Displays the ROM number and firmware version
numbers.
803* PM Counter Display
Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
804 PM Counter Resets
Resets the PM counter. To reset, press Execute on the
touch panel.
807 SC/Jam Counter Reset
Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press
Execute on the touch panel.
This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7-
507, SP7-508.
808 Resets Counters
Resets all counters except SP7-003-***, SP7-006-***
and SP7-007-***. To reset, press Execute on the touch
panel.
810 Key Operator Code Reset
Use to clear the key operator code if the key operator
forgets the code. After clearing the code is reset for
Null and the password entry display does not open. To
clear, press Execute on the touch panel.
811 Original Count Clear
Clears the original total display, displayed with SP7-
002-***. To clear, press Execute on the touch panel.
816 Print Counter Reset
1 Tray1 Resets the total copy count by paper tray. To reset,
2 Tray2 press Execute on the touch panel.
3 Tray3 Use these SP modes when replacing the pick-up, feed,
4 Tray4 and separation rollers.
5 LCT
6 By-pass
822 Copy Counter Reset Magnification
Resets all counters of SP7-301 (Copy Count:
Magnification). To reset, press Execute on the touch
panel.
825 Total Counter Reset
Resets all electronic counters. To reset, press Execute
on the touch panel.
Usually, this SP mode is done at installation. This SP
mode is effective only once, when the counter has a
negative value.
826 MF Device Error Count
1 Error Count Japan only DFU
2 Staple Error Count Japan only DFU
827 MF Device Error Count Clear

Japan only DFU
4-50

832 Self-Diagnosis Result Display
Execute to open the “Self-Diagnostics Result Display”
to view details about errors. Use the keys in the
display on the touch-panel to scroll through all the
information. If no errors have occurred, you will see the
“No Error” message on the screen.
904 Copy Counter Reset: Copy Mode
Resets all counters for SP7-301, SP7-304. To reset,
press Execute on the touch panel.
905 Job Counter Reset: Set Number
Resets all counters for SP7-305. To reset, press
907 Job Counter Reset: Copy Mode
Resets all counters for SP7-306. To reset, press
909 PCU Counter Display
Displays the value of the PCU counter (number of
copies since the last PCU change).
920 Document Server: Scan Storage Reset
Service
Tables
Clears the count for SP7-320. To reset, press Execute
on the touch panel.
921 Document Server: Original Counter Reset
Clears the counters for SP7-321. To reset, press
923 Document Server: Print Counter Reset by Size
924 Document Server: Print Job Counter Reset
925 Document Server: Job Counter Reset – Page Number
926 Document Server: Job Count Reset – File Number
927 Document Server: Job Counter Reset – Set Number
928 Document Server: Print Count Reset – Print Mode
930 Copy Document Server: All Counter Clear
Execute this SP to clear the following SP modes:
SP7-301 Copy Count: Magnification
SP7-304 Copy Count: Copy Mode
SP7-305 Copy Counter: Copy Mode
SP7-306 Job Counter: Copy Mode
SP7-320 Doc. Server: Scan Storage
SP7-321 Doc. Server: Original Counter
SP7-323 Doc. Server: Paper Size Counter
4-51

930 SP7-324 Document Server: Job Counter
SP7-325 Doc. Server: Job Counter – Page No.
SP7-326 Doc. Server: Job Counter – File No.
SP7-327 Doc. Server: Job Counter – Set No.
SP7-328 Doc. Server: Count by Mode
SP9-XXX: Debug/Testing
913* 2nd Paper Feed Amount
Adjusts the amount of paper feed from the 2nd paper
tray.
Set a larger value when noise occurs during paper
feed from the 2nd tray.
[0 ~ 99.9 / 60.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4-52
4.2.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP2-902-3)

NOTE: Always print a test pattern to confirm correct operation of the machine.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-902-3.
2. Press !.
3. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press ". (See
the tables below.)
4. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press Yes. This selects the
test pattern for printing.
5. Press Copy Window to open the copy window and then select the settings for
the test print (paper size, etc.)
6. Press Start # twice. (Ignore the “Place Original” messages) to start the test
print.
7. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
Service
No. Test Pattern No. Test Pattern
Tables
0 None 15 Grayscale (Grid)
1 Vertical Line (1-dot) 16 Grayscale with White Line (Horizontal)
2 Horizontal Line (1-dot) 17 Grayscale with White Line (Vertical)
3 Vertical Line (2-dot) 18 Grayscale with White Line (Vertical
/Horizontal)
4 Horizontal Line (2 dot) 23 P Pattern
5 Grid Pattern (1-dot) 31 Grayscale (Horizontal, 8bit, Odd)
6 Grid Pattern (1-dot pair) 32 Grayscale (Vertical, 8bit, Odd)
7 Alternating Dot Pattern 33 Grayscale with White Line (Horizontal
8bit, Odd)
8 Full Dot Pattern 34 Grayscale with White Line (Vertical 8bit,
Odd)
9 Black band 35 Grayscale (Horizontal, 8bit, Even)
10 Trimming Area 36 Grayscale (Vertical, 8bit, Even)
11 Argyle Pattern 37 Grayscale with White Line (Horizontal
8bit, Even)
12 Grayscale (Horizontal) 38 Grayscale with White Line (Vertical 8bit,
Even)
13 Grayscale (Vertical) 40 Grid (1-dot pair) (OR Outside Data 1)
14 Grayscale (Vertical/Horizontal) 41 Trimming Area (OR Outside Data)
4-53
4.2.4 INPUT CHECK

Main Machine Input Check (SP5-803)
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5-803.
2. Enter the number (1 – 11) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit 76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
Reading
Number Bit Description
0 1
7 Paper Height Sensor 2 (2nd Activated Deactivated
Tray)
6 Paper Height Sensor 1 (2nd Activated Deactivated
Tray)
5 Paper Height Sensor 2 (1st Activated Deactivated
Tray)
1
4 Paper Height Sensor 1 (1st Activated Deactivated
Tray)
3 Paper End Sensor (2nd Tray) Paper End Paper is present
2 Upper Relay Sensor Activated Deactivated
1 Lower Right Cover Open Closed Open
0 Not used
7 Paper Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
6 Fusing Unit Unit Set Unit not set
5 PCU Set Activated Deactivated
4 New PCU Sensor Activated Deactivated
2
3 Interchange Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
2 1 bin Tray Unit Set Unit Set Unit not set
1 1 bin Tray Paper Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Interchange Unit Set Unit Set Unit not set
7 Bridge Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
6 Not used
5 Bridge Paper Sensor Activated Deactivated
4 Bridge Right Guide Switch Activated Deactivated
3
3 Bridge Left Guide Switch Activated Deactivated
2 Bridge Unit Set Unit Set Unit not set
1 Bridge Fan Motor Lock Locked Unlocked
0 Shift Tray Unit Set Unit Set Unit not set
4-54
Reading
0 1
7 Wake up Signal Not detected Detected
6 Lower Relay Sensor Activated Deactivated
5 Vertical Transport Sensor Activated Deactivated
(Optional paper tray unit)
4 3rd Tray Paper Size Activated Deactivated
3 4th Tray Paper Size Activated Deactivated
4
2 Motor Lock (Optional paper tray Not locked Locked
unit)
1 Height Sensor (Optional paper Activated Deactivated
tray unit)
0 Unit Set (Optional paper tray Unit set Unit not set
unit)
7 Fusing Drive Release Solenoid Activated Deactivated
6 Main Motor Brake Signal Not active Active
5 Main Motor On Signal Activated Deactivated
4 Main Motor Rotation Direction Not active Active
5 Signal
3 3rd Paper End Sensor Paper End Paper is present
Service
Tables
2 4th Paper End Sensor Paper End Paper is present
1 3rd Paper Height Sensor Deactivated Activated
0 4th Paper Height Sensor Deactivated Activated
7 Duplex Unit Set Unit set Unit not set
6 Total Counter Not detected Detected
5 By-pass Tray Unit Set Detected Not detected
4 By-pass Paper End Sensor Paper End Paper is present
6
3 By-pass Paper Size 2 Activated Deactivated
7 Not Used
6 Not Used
5 Not Used
4 Not Used
7
3 Key Counter Set Detected Not detected
2 Key Card Set Detected Not detected
1 Polygon Motor Ready Signal Ready Not ready
0 Not Used
4-55
Reading
0 1
7 Dip Switch - 4 On Off
6 Dip Switch - 3 Off On
8
3 Not Used
2 Front Safety Sw – 5V On Off
1 Front Safety Sw – 24V Off On
0 Main Motor Ready Signal Ready Not ready
7 Not used
6 Relay Off Signal Not detected Detected
5 Toner Bottle Motor Lock Locked Not locked
4 Right Cover Open Closed Open
9
3 Registration Sensor Activated Deactivated
2 Exhaust Fan Lock Not locked Locked
1 Interchange Cover Open Closed Open
0 Paper Overflow Sensor Activated Deactivated
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
5 Not Used
4 Upper Relay Sensor Activated Deactivated
10
3 1st Paper End Paper End Paper is present
2 2nd Paper Lift Sensor Activated Deactivated
1 1st Paper Lift Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Not Used
7 2nd Paper Size 1 Activated Deactivated
11
3 1st Paper Size 1 Activated Deactivated
NOTE: Numbers 12 to 14 are not used for this machine.
4-56
ARDF Input Check (SP6-007)

2. Enter the number (1 – 11) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s, as shown
below. However, only bit 0 at the right side of the screen is valid.
00000000
Bit 76543210
3. Check the status of bit 0 for the required item listed in the table below.
W2
W1
Service
Tables
B027S600.WMF
Reading
No.. Description
0 1
1 Original set sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Original width sensor 1 (W1) Paper not detected Paper detected
3 Original width sensor 2 (W2) Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Original length sensor 1 (L1) Paper not detected Paper detected
5 Original length sensor 2 (L2) Paper not detected Paper detected
6 Original trailing edge sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
7 ADF cover sensor Cover closed Cover opened
8 DF position sensor ADF closed ADF opened
9 Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
10 Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
11 Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
4-57
Finisher Input Check (SP6-117)

2. Enter the number (1 – 4) for the item that you want to check. A small box will be
displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit 76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
For 1000-sheet Finisher

Reading
0 1
7 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
6 Not Used
5 Jogger Fence HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
4 Stapler HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
1
3 Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated
2 Not Used
1 Lower Tray Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated
7 Not Used
6 Not Used
5 Stapler Ready Signal Activated Deactivated
4 Not Used
2
3 Not Used
2 Staple Sensor Activated Deactivated
1 Staple Hammer HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Stapler Tray Paper Sensor Activated Deactivated
7 Not Used
6 Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated
5 Not used
4 Stack Height Sensor Activated Deactivated
3
3 Not Used
2 Not Used
1 Shift HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Exit Guide HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
4-58
Reading
0 1
7 Not Used
6 Not Used
5 Not Used
4 Not Used
3
3 Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated
2 Not Used
1 Not Used
0 Not Used
For 500-sheet Finisher

Reading
0 1
7 Stack Near-limit Sensor Activated Deactivated
6 Tray Upper Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated
5 Lever Sensor Activated Deactivated
Service
Tables
4 Stack Height Sensor Activated Deactivated
1
3 Top Cover Sensor Closed Opened
2 Jogger HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
1 Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated
7 Not Used
6 Not Used
5 Not Used
4 Staple Unit Lock Locked Not Locked
2
3 Staple Cartridge Sensor Activated Deactivated
2 Staple End Sensor Activated Deactivated
1 Staple Hammer HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Staple Unit Cover Switch Closed Opened
4-59
4.2.5 OUTPUT CHECK

NOTE: Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor
signals. To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an
electrical component on for a long time.
Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804)

1. Open SP mode 5-804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table on the next page.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item.
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off
the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical
component switched on for a long time.
B027S502.WMF
Output Check Table

NOTE: Pull out the tray before performing the output checks 25, 26, 29, and 30.
Number Description
0 Not used
1 Main motor (forward)
2 Main motor (Reverse) Do not use
3 Registration clutch
4 Not used
5 Toner supply motor
6 Exhaust fan (High Speed)
7 Exhaust fan (Low Speed)
8 By-pass feed clutch
9 Upper paper feed clutch
10 Lower paper feed clutch
11 Upper paper lift motor (Up)
12 Upper paper lift motor (Down)
13 Lower paper lift motor (Up)
4-60
Number Description
14 Lower paper lift motor (Down)
15 Upper relay clutch
16 Lower relay clutch
17 Fusing drive release solenoid
18 ~ 20 Not Used
21 Relay clutch (Optional paper tray unit)
22 Upper paper feed clutch (Optional paper tray unit)
23 Lower paper feed clutch (Optional paper tray unit)
24 Tray motor (Optional paper tray unit)
25 Upper Paper lift motor (Up) (Optional paper tray unit or LCT)
26 Upper paper lift motor (Down) (Optional paper tray unit or LCT)
27 Lower paper lift motor (Up) (Optional paper tray unit)
28 Lower paper lift motor (Down) (Optional paper tray unit)
29 Rear fence motor (forward) (Optional LCT)
30 Rear fence motor (reverse (Optional LCT)
31 Side fence solenoid (Optional LCT)
32 Shift tray motor (Optional shift tray)
Service
Tables
33 Exit junction gate (Optional interchange unit)
34 Duplex junction gate (Optional interchange unit)
35 ~ 40 Not used
41 Duplex inverter motor (Reverse) (Optional duplex unit)
42 Duplex inverter motor (Forward) (Optional duplex unit)
43 Duplex transport motor (Optional duplex unit)
44 Inverter gate solenoid (Optional duplex unit)
45 ~ 50 Not used
51 Bridge cooling fan motor (Optional bridge unit)
52 Bridge unit drive motor (Optional bridge unit)
53 Junction gate solenoid (Optional bridge unit)
54 ~ 59 Not used
60 Polygonal mirror motor
61 Polygonal mirror motor and laser diode
62 Laser diode - Do not use
53 ~ 80 Not used
81 Duplex unit free run (without paper)
82 Duplex unit free run (with paper)
4-61
ARDF Output Check (SP6-008)

1. Open SP mode SP6-008.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
No. Description
1 Feed Motor (Forward)
2 Feed Motor (Reverse)
3 Transport Motor (Forward)
4 Feed Clutch
5 Pick-up Solenoid
6 Junction Gate Solenoid
7 Stamp Solenoid
Finisher Output Check (SP6-118)

1. Open SP mode SP6-118.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
No. Description
1000-sheet finisher 500-sheet finisher
1 Upper Transport Motor Main Motor
2 Shift Tray Lift Motor Output Tray Motor
3 Staple Hammer Motor Stapler Motor
4 Shift Motor Jogger Motor
5 Lower Transport Motor Not Used
6 Shift Tray Exit Motor Not Used
7 Tray Junction Gate Solenoid Not Used
8 Jogger Motor Not Used
9 Stapler Motor Not Used
10 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid Not Used
11 Positioning Roller Solenoid Not Used
12 Stack Feed-out Motor Not Used
13 Exit Guide Plate Motor Not Used
14 Not Used Paddle Roller Solenoid
15 Not Used Exit Unit Gear Solenoid
16 Not Used Stack Height Lever Solenoid
17
4-62
4.2.6 SMC DATA LISTS (SP5-990)
1. Open SP mode 5-990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you
wish to print.
SMC (System Parameter and Data Lists)
1 All Data List
2 SP Mode Data List
3 UP Mode Data List
4 Logging Data List
5 Self-Diagnostics Results List
7 NIB Summary
21 Copy UP Mode List
22 Scanner SP Mode List
23 Scanner UP Mode List
2. Touch “Execute” on the touch panel

3. Select. “Single Face” or “Both Face” then touch “Execute” to start printing.
Service
Tables
4. After printing the list, press Exit twice to close the SP Mode screen and return
to copy mode.
4-63
4.2.7 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5-801)

Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:
SP7-003-1: Electrical total counter value

SP5-811-1: Machine serial number
SP5-907: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
Normally, this SP mode should not be used. This procedure is necessary only after
replacing the NVRAM, or when the copier malfunctions because the NVRAM is
damaged.
Using a Flash Memory Card
1. Upload the NVRAM data to a flash memory card (☛ NVRAM Data Upload).
2. Print out all SMC data lists (SP mode 5-990).
NOTE: Be sure to print out all the lists. If the NVRAM data upload was not
completed, it is necessary to change the SP mode settings by hand.
4. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to
initialize all modules, or select the appropriate number from the table below.
No. What It Initializes Comments
1 All modules Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below.
2 Engine Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
process settings.
3 SCS (System Control Initializes default system settings, CSS settings,
Service)/SRAM operation display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
5 MCS (Memory Control Initializes the automatic delete time setting for
Service) stored documents.
6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook
timer.
8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,
the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS
counter.
9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and
all the scanner SP modes.
10 Network application Deletes the network file application management
files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
11 NCS (Network Control Initializes the system defaults and interface settings
Service) (IP addresses also), SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET
settings.
12 R-FAX Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
4-64
5. Press Execute and turn the main switch off and back on.
6. Download the NVRAM data from a flash memory card (☛ NVRAM Data
Download).
Without Using a Flash Memory Card

If there is no flash memory card, follow the steps below.
1. Execute SP5-990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize.
4. Press Execute and turn the main switch off and back on.
5. Make sure that you do the following:
• Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments (☛ 3
Replacement and Adjustment, “Copy Adjustments”).
• Do the touch screen calibration (☛ 3 Replacement and Adjustment, “touch
screen calibration”).
Service
Tables
• Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter any values, which had been
changed from their factory settings.
• Do SP 3-001-2 (ID Sensor Initial Setting) and SP4-911-1 (HDD media
check).
• Do the white level adjustment (☛ Section 6.8.2 Standard White Density
Adjustment)
6. Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.
4-65
4.2.8 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA

The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from a flash
memory card.
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824)

The contents of the NVRAM in the machine can be uploaded to a flash memory
card.
[B]
[A]
B022S999.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch.

2. Remove the application cover [A].
3. Plug the flash memory card [B] into the card slot.
5. Open SP5-824.
6. Touch “Execute” to start uploading the NVRAM data.
7. Turn off the main switch, then remove the IC card.
4-66
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825)

This downloads data from a flash card to the NVRAM inside the machine.
The following data are not downloaded from the flash card:
• Total count categories (SP7-003-*** Copy Counter)
• C/O, P/O Counter (SP7-006-*** C/O, P/O Count Display)
• Duplex, A3/DLT/Over 420 mm, Staple and Scanner application scanning
counters (system settings).
[B]
[A]
Service
Tables
B022S999.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch.

3. Plug the flash memory card [B] into the card slot.
8. Open SP5-825.
5. Touch “Execute” to start download the NVRAM data.
6. Turn off the main switch, then remove the IC card.
Note that the following errors could occur during downloading:

• If a card is not installed in the card slot and a message tells you that
downloading cannot proceed, you cannot execute downloading, even by
pressing “Execute”
• If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you
press “Execute” a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed
because the card is abnormal and the execution will halt.
4-67
4.2.9 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301)

When open this SP, a small box will be displayed on the SP mode screen with a
series of 0’s and 1’s. The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 = Paper detected
[230V Machine] [115V Machine]
L2 L1 L2 L1
L4 L3
W2 W2
W1 W1
B027S511.WMF B027S512.WMF
Bit Description
7 L1
6 L2
5 L3
4 L4
3 W2
2 W1
1 Not Used
0 Not Used
4-68
4.2.10 DF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP6-901)

When open this SP, a small box will be displayed on the SP mode screen with a
series of 0’s and 1’s. The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit 76543210
1 = Paper detected
illustration to be changed
W2
W1
Service
Tables
B027S600.WMF
Large Small
W1 0 0 1 1
W2 0 1 0 1
Bit Description
7 Not Used
6 Not Used
5 W1
4 W2
3 L1
2 L2
1 L3
0 Not Used
4-69
4.2.11 NIP BAND WIDTH MEASUREMENT (SP1-109)
OHP
Paper feed direction

[A]
B027S513.WMF
When paper wrinkling or image off-set occurs, the pressure from the pressure roller
can be adjusted by changing the position of the pressure springs. At this time, the
nip band width can also be checked with SP1-109, as follows.
1. Do a free run (SP5-802) for about 50 sheets.
2. Access SP1-109 and press the “1” key.
3. Press Copy Window to return to the copy window.
4. Place an OHP sheet (A4/8.5”x11” sideways) on the by-pass tray or in the 2nd
paper tray.
5. Press the “Start” key.
The OHP sheet is stopped in the fusing unit for about 20 seconds, then it will
be fed automatically.
6. Check the nip band width [A]. The relationship between the position of the
pressure spring and the band width is as follows.
NOTE: Check the nip band width around the center of the OHP.
1. Pressure spring position Nip band width

Upper (default position) 5.2 ± 0.5 mm
Lower 5.3 ± 0.5 mm
2. Envelope feed mode (green lever down) at the 4.7 ± 0.5 mm
default pressure spring position
If the width is out of the above specification, the pressure spring should be
replaced.
4-70
10 August, 2001 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
4.3 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
[B]
[A]
B022S999.WMF
1. Turn off the main power switch.

Service
Tables
3. Insert the IC card [B] containing the software you wish to download into the
card slot of the controller.
4. Turn on the main power.
5. Follow the instructions displayed on the LCD panel
6. Monitor the downloading status on the operation panel.
• While downloading is in progress, the LCD will display “Writing”. When
downloading has been completed, the panel will display “OK”.
• For operation panel software, the Start key lights red while downloading is in
progress, and then lights green again after downloading is completed.
$CAUTION
Never switch off the power while downloading. Switching off the power while the
new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller.
7. After confirming that downloading is completed, turn off the main power and
remove the IC card.
8. If more software needs to be downloaded, repeat steps 1 to 7.
9. Turn the main power on and confirm that the new software loads and that the
machine starts normally.
NOTE: If the download failed, an error message will appear on the panel. Then,
download the firmware again using the IC card as usual.
4-71
SOFTWARE RESET 10 August, 2001
4.4 SOFTWARE RESET

The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Use the following
procedure.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-or-
Press and hold down ! " together for over 10 seconds. When the machine
beeps once release both buttons. After “Now loading. Please wait” is displayed for
a few seconds the copy window will open. The machine is ready for normal
operation.
4.5 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET

4.5.1 SYSTEM SETTING RESET
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the
following procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .

2. Hold down " and then press System Settings.
NOTE: You must press " first.
B027S503.WMF
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system
settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
4-72
10 August, 2001 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET
4.5.2 COPIER SETTING RESET

The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following
procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .

2. Hold down " and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
NOTE: You must press " first.
Service
Tables
B027S504.WMF
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier
Document Server settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
4-73
USER TOOLS 10 August, 2001
4.6 USER TOOLS

The user program (UP) mode can be accessed by users and operators, and by
sales and service staff. UP mode is used to input the copier’s default settings. The
user can reset the default settings at any time. (☛ 4.5)
4.6.1 HOW TO USE UP MODE

UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display
To enter the UP mode, press User Tools/Counter .
B027S505.WMF
System Settings
In the User Tools/Counter display, press System Settings.
Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
press it to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the
User Tools/Counter display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
B027S707.WMF
4-74
10 August, 2001 USER TOOLS
Copier/Document Server Features

In the User/Tools Counter display, press Copy/Document Server Settings.
Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
press it to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the
User Tools/Counter display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
B027S701.WMF
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings
Service
Tables
In the User/Tools Counter display, press Printer Settings, Facsimile, or Scanner
Settings to open the appropriate screen and then click the tab to display more
settings. The screen below shows the Printer Features screen.
Inquiry
In the User/Tools Counter display, press Inquiry.
The following SP mode settings will be displayed.
• Service Telephone Number (SP5-812-1)
• Sales Telephone Number (SP812-4)
• Consumable Telephone Number (SP812-3)
• Toner Name (SP-841)
B027S705.WMF
4-75
USER TOOLS 10 August, 2001
Counter
In the User/Tools Counter display, press Counter.
B027S706.WMF
The following SP mode counters will be displayed.
• Copy Counter (SP5-914-2)
• A3/DLT Counter (SP5-918)
• Printer Counter (SP5-914-1)
View the settings, press Print Counter Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter
display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
4-76
10 August, 2001 LEDS
4.7 LEDS
Controller
Number Normal Controller Software Error

Download
LED 1 Off Blinking Off
LED 2 Blinking Blinking Lit or Off
LED 3 Lit Lit Lit
(+5V line)
SBCU
Number Normal SBCU Software Error

Download
LED 1 Lit Lit Off or Blinking
Blinking Lit Lit (except downloading)
LED 2
or Off
Service
Tables
IPU
Number Normal Error

LED 1 Lit Off or Blinking
4.8 DIP SWITCHES

Controller: DIP SW2
DIP SW No. ON OFF
1 IC Card Boot System ROM Boot
2
3 Keep at “OFF”
4
SBCU: DIP SW102

DIP SW No. Function ON OFF
1 On: Japan Off: NA On: EU/Asia Off: Not Used
2 Destination On On Off Off
3 On On On On
4 Not used OFF (Do not change)
4-77
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS 10 August, 2001
4.9 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

4.9.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number Description Q’ty

A2929500 S5S Test Chart (10 pcs/set) 1
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs/set) 1
A0299387 Digital Multimeter - FLUKE 87 1
A2309351 Case - Flash Memory Card 1
N8036701 Flash Memory Card - 4MB 1
B0279099 NVRAM - Minus Counter 1
A2309003 Adjustment Cam – Laser Unit 1
A2679002 Positioning Pin - Laser Unit 1
4.9.2 LUBRICANTS
Part Number Description Q’ty

A0289300 Grease Barrierta - JFE 5 5/2 1
52039501 Silicone Grease G-501 1
4-78
10 August, 2001 PM TABLE
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

5.1 PM TABLE
NOTE: 1) The amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of
prints.
2) After carrying out PM, clear the maintenance counter (SP7-804).
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
A265/A267 EM 120K 240K 360K NOTE

SCANNER/LASER OPTICS
Reflector C C C Optics cloth
1st Mirror C C C C Optics cloth
2nd Mirror C C C C Optics cloth
3rd Mirror C C C C Optics cloth
Scanner Guide Rails C C C Do not use alcohol.
Platen Sheet Cover C I I I Replace the platen sheet, if
necessary.
Dry cloth or alcohol
Exposure Glass C C C Dry cloth or alcohol
Toner Shield Glass C C C Optics cloth
Maintenance
Preventive
APS Sensor C C C Dry cloth or blower brush
AROUND THE DRUM

Transfer/Separation R R R
Unit
ID Sensor C C C Perform the ID sensor initial
setting (SP2-935) after
cleaning (blower brush)
PAPER FEED
Registration Rollers C C C C Clean with water
Paper Feed Roller C R R R Clean with water
Friction Pad C R R R Dry cloth
Paper Feed Guides C C C C Clean with alcohol.
Relay Rollers C C C C Clean with water.
Bottom Plate Pad C C C C Clean with water.
Registration Roller C C C C Clean with water.
Mylar
FUSING UNIT AND PAPER EXIT

Fusing Entrance and C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Exit Guide Plates
Hot Roller R R R
Pressure Roller R R R
Fusing Thermistors R R R
5-1
PM TABLE 10 August, 2001
A265/A267 EM 120K 240K 360K NOTE

Cleaning Roller C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Cleaning Roller C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Bushings
Hot Roller Strippers R R R
Hot Roller and L L L L Grease Barrierta JFE5 5/2
Pressure Roller (A0289300)
Bushings
Paper Exit Guide C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Ribs
OTHERS
Main Motor Drive L I I I Silicone Grease G501
Gear (see note 1)
EM 120K 240K 360K NOTE

ADF (for originals)
Pick-up Roller C R R R Clean with water
Feed Belt C R R R Clean with water
Separation Roller C R R R Clean with water
Stamp I I I Replace if necessary
ADF Exposure Glass C C C C Clean with alcohol
White Plate C C C C Clean with alcohol
Platen Sheet C C C C Clean with alcohol

PAPER TRAY UNIT
Paper Feed Roller C R R R Clean with water
Friction Pad C R R R Dry cloth
Paper Feed Guides C C C C Clean with alcohol.
Relay Rollers C C C C Clean with water.
Bottom Plate Pad C C C C Clean with water.
Relay Clutch I I I Replace if necessary
Paper Feed Clutch I I I Replace if necessary

LCT
Paper Feed Roller R R R
Pick-up Roller R R R
Separation Roller R R R
Transport Rollers C C C Clean with water
Bottom Plate Pad C C C Clean with water
Relay Clutch I I I Replace if necessary
Paper Feed Clutch I I I Replace if necessary
5-2
10 August, 2001 PM TABLE

1,000-SHEET FINISHER
Rollers C Clean with water or alcohol.
Brush Roller I I I I Replace if necessary.
Discharge Brush C C C C Clean with a dry cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger Fences I I I I Replace if necessary.

1-BIN TRAY UNIT
Rollers C Dry or damp cloth
Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
NOTE 1.
Main Motor Drive Gear
Maintenance
Preventive
[A] B027P500.WMF
Do the following every EM:

Lubricate the main motor drive gear [A] with silicone grease G501.
5-3
10 August, 2001 SCANNER UNIT
6. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

!CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting
any of the procedures in this section.
6.1 SCANNER UNIT

6.1.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
B027R001.WMF
1. Open the ADF or platen cover.

2. Remove the left scale [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the rear scale [B] (3 screws).
4. Remove the exposure glass [C].
NOTE: When reinstalling the exposure glass, make sure that the mark [D] is
positioned at the rear left corner, as shown.
6-1
SCANNER UNIT 10 August, 2001
6.1.2 SCANNER EXTERIOR/OPERATION PANEL
[E] [D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B022R002.WMF
1. Remove the ADF or platen cover.

2. Remove the exposure glass. (☛ 6.1.1)
3. Remove the upper front cover [A] (1 screw, 1 hook).
4. Remove the operation panel [B] (5 screws, 1 connector).
5. Remove the right cover [C] (1 screw, 2 hooks).
6. Remove the rear cover [D] (2 screws).
7. Remove the left cover [E] (2 screws, 2 hooks).
6-2
6.1.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY
[A]
[B]
B022R003.WMF
B022R006.WMF
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Remove the lens cover [A] (4 screws).
3. Replace the lens block assembly [B] (4 screws, 1 connector, 2 clamps).
NOTE: Do not remove the screws which are locked with white paint.
4. Reassemble the machine and do the scanner and printer copy adjustments. (☛
6.8)
6-3
6.1.4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS

[B]
[A]
B027R054.WMF

2. Remove the lens cover. (☛ 6.1.3)
3. Remove the original width sensor [A] (1 screw, 1 connector).
4. Remove the lens block. (☛ 6.1.3)
5. Remove the original length sensors [B] (1 screw, 1 connector each).
6-4
6.1.5 EXPOSURE LAMP
[C] [E]
[F]
[B]
[D]
[A]
B027R515.WMF B027R008.WMF
[H]
[G]
Replacement
Adjustment
B027R009.WMF

2. Remove the operation panel, rear cover, and left cover. (☛ 6.1.2)
3. Remove the connector cover [A], disconnect the cable, and remove the rear
cover [B] (4 screws).
4. Remove the left upper stay [C] (1 screw).
5. Remove the front frame [D] (5 screws).
6. Remove the rear bracket [E] (5 screws, 2 connectors).
7. Remove the rear frame [F] (2 screws, 1 connector).
8. Push down the part [G] then slide out the exposure lamp [H] (1 connector).
NOTE: 1) Do not touch the glass surface of the exposure lamp with bare hands.
2) After installing the lamp, the part [G] must be returned to the original
position.
6-5
6.1.6 SCANNER MOTOR/LAMP STABILIZER
[B]
[A]
B027R515.WMF
[C]
[D]
B022R007.WMF
1. Remove the connector cover [A], disconnect the cable, and remove the rear
cover [B].
2. Replace the scanner motor [C] (3 screws, 1 spring, 1 connector).
3. Replace the lamp stabilizer [D] (2 connectors).
4. Reassemble the machine and do the scanner and printer copy adjustments. (☛
6.8)
6-6
6.1.7 SCANNER WIRES
[A]
B027R012.WMF
1. Remove the exposure glass, operation panel, and all scanner exterior covers.
(☛ 6.1.1 and 6.1.2)
2. Remove the left upper stay. (☛ 6.1.5)
3. Remove the front frame. (☛ 6.1.5)
4. Remove the rear bracket. (☛ 6.1.5)
5. Remove the rear frame. (☛ 6.1.5)
6. Remove the lens cover. (☛ 6.1.3)
7. Remove the lens block assembly. (☛ 6.1.3)
8. Remove the front and rear scanner wire pins [A]. Then, remove the 1st
Replacement
Adjustment
scanner.
6-7
[F]
[E]
[C]
[B]
B027R010.WMF
[D]
9. Remove the tension spring [B].

10. Loosen the screw [C] securing the wire tension bracket [D].
11. Remove the scanner drive pulley [E] (1 set screw).
12. Remove the scanner wire [F].
13. Wrap the new scanner wire around the pulley as shown ➀, then temporarily
secure the pulley with tape.
14. Re-install the 1st scanner. Then secure the 1st and 2nd scanner with the
scanner positioning tools (P/N A0069104), as shown in the illustration on the
next page.
15. Wind the new scanner wire around the scanner drive pulley in the correct way,
as shown.
16. Wind the end of the new wire with the ball as shown (➁).
17. Wind the end of the new wire with the ring as shown (➂,➃, and ➄).
18. Install the tension spring on the wire tension bracket (➄).
19. Wind the new scanner wire for the other side as well.
6-8
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B027R011.WMF
20. Secure the 1st scanner with the scanner wire pins.
21. Install the tension spring [A] to the tension bracket.
22. Tighten the tension bracket [B].
23. Secure the scanner wire pulley [C] (1 Allen screw).
24. Remove the positioning tools [D]. After sliding the scanner to the right and left
Replacement
several times, re-install the positioning tools to check the scanner wire bracket
Adjustment
and tension bracket again.
25. Reassemble the scanner and do the scanner and printer copy adjustments (☛
6.8).
6-9
LASER UNIT 10 August, 2001
6.2 LASER UNIT

!WARNING
any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage
your eyes.
6.2.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below.
LASER-4.WMF
B027R104.WMF
6-10
10 August, 2001 LASER UNIT
6.2.2 LASER UNIT
[A]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[B]
B027R101.WMF B027R102.WMF
[F]
[G]
B027R103.WMF
!WARNING
Replacement
Adjustment
this procedure. Laser beam can seriously damage your eyes.
1. Remove the optional finisher/bridge unit, and either the tray for the optional 1-
bin tray unit or optional shift tray, if these units have been installed.
2. Remove the upper front cover [A] (1 screw, 1 hook).
3. Remove the front cover [B] (2 pins).
4. Remove the inner cover [C] (5 screws).
5. Remove the copy tray [D] (1 hook [E]).
6. Remove the toner bottle holder [F].
7. Remove the laser unit [G] (2 screws, 2 connectors).
8. After reassembling the machine, do the scanner and printer copy adjustments.
(☛ 6.8)
6-11
LASER UNIT 10 August, 2001
6.2.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR

[B] [A]
B027R104.WMF
1. Remove the laser unit (☛ 6.2.2).

2. Remove the heat sink [A] (4 screws).
3. Replace the polygon mirror motor [B] (4 screws, 1 connector).
NOTE: When installing the new polygon mirror motor, do not touch the surface of
the mirror with bare hands.
6.2.4 LD UNIT
[B]
[A]
B027R105.WMF

2. Replace the LD unit [A] (3 screws, 1 connector).
NOTE: 1) Do not remove the screws [B].
2) Do not touch any variable resistors on the LD unit.
6-12
10 August, 2001 LASER UNIT
6.2.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR
[A]
[B]
B027R106.WMF [D]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
B027R107.WMF

2. Remove the heat sink [A] (4 screws).
3. Remove the laser unit cover [B] (3 screws).
4. Remove the bracket [C] (1 screw).
5. Replace the laser synchronization detector [D] (1 connector).
6-13
6.3 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

6.3.1 PCU
[B]
[D] [A]
[C]
B027R203.WMF
1. Open the right cover [A] and front cover [B].

2. Pull the PCU [C] out slightly while pushing the release lever [D].
NOTE: Do not touch the drum surface with bare hands.
6-14
10 August, 2001 TRANSFER UNIT
6.4 TRANSFER UNIT

6.4.1 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT
[B]
[A]
B027R401.WMF
1. Open the right cover [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Remove the transfer roller unit [B] (1 hook).
NOTE: Do not touch the transfer roller surface.
6-15
TRANSFER UNIT 10 August, 2001
6.4.2 IMAGE DENSITY SENSOR
[B]
[A]
B027R201.WMF
[D]
[C]
B027R202.WMF
1. Open the right cover [A].

2. Remove the unit band [B].
3. Remove the right cover [A] (1 connector),
4. Remove the sub right cover [C] (2 hooks).
5. Replace the image density sensor [D] (1 connector).
6. Initialize the new sensor with SP 2-935.
6-16
10 August, 2001 FUSING/EXIT
6.5 FUSING/EXIT
6.5.1 FUSING UNIT
!CAUTION
Allow time for the unit to cool before doing the following procedure.
[A]
B027R501.WMF
1. Release the duplex unit, if it has been installed, and open the right cover.
2. Remove the fusing unit [A] (2 screws).
6.5.2 THERMISTORS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
[B]
B022R551.WMF
1. Remove the fusing unit. (☛ 6.5.1).

2. Remove the plates [A] (1 screw each).
3. Replace the thermistors [B] (1 connector).
6-17
FUSING/EXIT 10 August, 2001
6.5.3 THERMOFUSE
[A]
B027R503.WMF
[C]
[B]
[B]
B022R552.WMF
1. Remove the fusing unit. (☛ 6.5.1)

2. Remove the fusing upper cover [A] (4 screws).
3. Remove the pressure springs [B].
4. Remove the hot roller stripper bracket [C] (3 screws).
6-18
[B]
[A]
[C]
B022R553.WMF
[D]
[D]
[C]
B022R554.WMF
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Remove the thermostat cover [A] (2 tapping screws).
6. Remove the plate [B] (2 screws with spring washer).
7. Remove the thermostat holder [C] (3 screws each).
8. Replace the thermostats [D].
6-19
6.5.4 HOT ROLLER AND FUSING LAMP
[A]
B022R505.WMF
[B]
B027R506.WMF
1. Remove the fusing unit. (☛ 6.5.1)

2. Remove the fusing upper cover. (☛ Thermostat.)
3. Remove the pressure springs. (☛ Thermostat.)
4. Remove the hot roller stripper bracket. (☛ Thermostat.)
5. Remove the fusing lamps (4 screws) and hot roller assembly [A].
NOTE: Do not touch the surface of the fusing lamp with bare hands.
6. Replace the hot roller [B] (2 C-rings, 1 gear, 2 bushings).
NOTE: 1) Apply grease (Barrierta) to the inner surface of the bushing.
2) Before installing the new hot roller, peel off 3 cm (1 inch) from both
ends of the protective sheet on the new roller.
3) Do not touch the surface of the rollers.
4) When reinstalling the fusing lamp, secure the front screws first.
5) Be careful not to damage the surface of the hot roller.
6-20
6.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER/CLEANING ROLLER
[A]
[B]
B027R507.WMF
1. Remove the fusing lamp and hot roller assembly. (☛ 6.5.4)

2. Replace the pressure roller [A] (1 E-ring, 2 bushings, 1 spring).
3. Replace the cleaning roller [B].
NOTE: 1) Apply grease (Barrierta) to the inner surface of the bushing for the
pressure roller.
Replacement
Adjustment
2) Do not touch the surface of the rollers.
6-21
6.5.6 PAPER EXIT SENSOR/PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR
[A]
[B]
[D]
B027R601.WMF
[C]
1. Remove the front upper cover [A] (1 screw, 1 peg).

2. Remove the exit cover [B].
NOTE: If the optional 1 bin tray unit and/or interchange unit have been
installed, remove them.
3. Replace the exit sensor [C] (1 connector).
4. Replace the overflow sensor [D] (1 connector).
6-22
6.6 PAPER FEED

6.6.1 FEED ROLLERS
[B]
[C]
[A] B027R723.WMF
1. Remove the paper tray [A].

2. Pull the lever [B].
3. Replace the feed roller [C].
NOTE: Do not touch the roller surface with bare hands.
After reinstalling the feed roller, return the lever [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
6-23
6.6.2 PAPER END SENSOR
[B]
[A] B027R724.WMF
1. Remove the paper tray [A].

2. Remove the paper end sensor assembly (1 screw, 1 connector).
3. Replace the paper end sensor [B].
6-24
6.6.3 PAPER TRAY LIFT MOTORS
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A] B027R515.WMF B027R705.WMF
[E]
Replacement
Adjustment
B027R707.WMF
1. Remove the paper tray.

2. Remove the connector cover [A] (1 screw) and disconnect the cable.
3. Remove the rear cover [B] (4 screws).
4. Remove the duplex connector cover [C] (1 screw).
5. Remove the lower rear cover [D] (2 screws).
6. Replace the paper lift motors [E] (2 screws each, 1 connector each).
6-25
6.6.4 REGISTRATION CLUTCH
[A]
[B]
B027R712.WMF
1. Remove the connector cover and the rear cover. (☛ 6.6.3)

2. Remove the duplex connector cover and lower rear cover. (☛ 6.6.3)
3. Remove the fly wheels [A] (1 screw).
4. Remove the registration clutch [B] (1 E-ring, 1 connector).
6-26
6.6.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

[B]
[F]
[D]
[E]
[C] [C] B027R709.WMF
B027R713.WMF
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B027R715.WMF
Lower Paper Feed Clutch

1. Remove the rear cover. (☛ 6.6.3)
2. Remove the lower rear cover. (☛ 6.6.3)
3. Replace the lower paper feed clutch [A] (1 connector).
Upper Paper Feed Clutch.

4. Disconnect the connectors [B] for the SBCU board as shown (14 connectors).
5. Remove 4 screws [C] securing the SBCU board bracket then swing down the
I/O board bracket [D].
6. Remove the bracket [E] (1 screw).
7. Replace the upper paper feed clutch [F] (1 connector).
6-27
6.6.6 RELAY CLUTCHES
[C]
[B]
[A] [D]
B027R716.WMF
B027R717.WMF
[F]
[E]
B027R714.WMF
1. Remove the optional duplex unit and/or by-pass tray unit if they have been
installed.
2. Remove the rear cover and lower rear cover. (☛ 6.6.3)
3. Remove the lower right cover [A] (2 screws).
4. Remove the scanner right cover. (☛ 6.1.2)
5. Remove the right cover [B] (4 screws).
6. Swing down the I/O board bracket. (☛ 6.6.5)
7. Remove the connector bracket [C] (2 screws).
8. Replace the upper relay clutch [D] (1 connector).
9. Remove the right back cover [E] (1 screw).
10. Replace the lower relay clutch [F] (1 connector).
6-28
6.6.7 PAPER SIZE DETECTOR
[A]
[B]
B027R721.WMF
[B]
Replacement
B022R722.WMF Adjustment
1. Remove the right lower cover [A]. (☛ 6.6.6)

2. Remove the paper trays.
3. Remove the paper size detector assembly (1 screw each).
4. Replace the paper size detectors [B] (1 connector each).
6-29
6.6.8 REGISTRATION SENSOR
[A]
[D]
[C]
B027R718.WMF
[B]
1. Remove the right cover. (☛ 6.4.2)

2. Remove the registration guide plate [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the paper support roller [B] (2 snap rings, 2 bushings).
4. Remove the sensor bracket [C] (1 screw).
5. Replace the registration sensor [D] (1 connector).
6-30
6.6.9 RELAY SENSORS
[D]
[A]
[E] [C]
[B] [I]
[H]
B027R719.WMF
[J]
[G]
[F]
B027R720.WMF
Upper Relay Sensor

1. Remove the right cover. (☛ 6.4.2)
2. Remove the lower right cover. (☛ 6.6.6)
3. Remove the guide plate [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Remove the bracket [B] (1 screw).
5. Remove the guide plate [C] (2 screws).
6. Remove the sensor bracket [D] (1 screw).
7. Replace the upper relay sensor [E] (1 connector).
Lower Relay Sensor

1. Remove the right lower door [F] (1 clip).
2. Remove the guide plate [G].
3. Remove the guide plate [H] (2 screws).
4. Remove the sensor bracket [I] (1 screw).
5. Replace the lower relay sensor [J] (1 connector).
6-31
PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS 10 August, 2001
6.7 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS

6.7.1 CONTROLLER BOARD
[A]
[B]
B022R951.WMF
[D]
[C]
B022R952.WMF

2. Remove the optional finisher if it has been installed.
3. Remove the application cover [A] (1 screw).
4. Remove the shield plate [B] (8 screws) or the optional fax unit if it has been
installed.
5. Remove the controller board [C] (2 connectors, 8 screws).
6. Remove the NVRAM [D], and DIMM (printer/scanner, memory, etc) from the
old controller board and put them on the new controller board.
6-32
10 August, 2001 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS
6.7.2 SBCU BOARD
[A]
B027R708.WMF

2. Remove the SBCU board [A] (All connectors, 6 screws).
6.7.3 POWER PACK
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
B027R710.WMF

2. Swing down the I/O board bracket. (☛ 6.6.5)
3. Remove the power pack [A] (5 connectors, 3 screws).
6-33
PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS 10 August, 2001
6.7.4 MAIN MOTOR
[B]
[C]
B027R711.WMF
[A]

2. Swing down the I/O board bracket [A]. (☛ 6.6.5)
3. Remove the fly wheels [B] (1 screw).
4. Replace the main motor [C] (2 connectors, 3 screws).
6-34
10 August, 2001 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS
6.7.5 PSU
[A]
[B] B027R701.WMF
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
[C] B022R702.WMF
1. Remove the optional finisher if it has been installed.

2. Remove the application cover [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the left cover [B] (6 screws).
4. 220 V machine only: Remove the transformer [C] (1 screw).
5. Remove the PSU [D] (all connectors, 6 screws, 1 clip).
6-35
COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING 10 August, 2001
6.8 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING

NOTE: 1) You need to perform these adjustment(s) after replacing any of the
following parts:
• Scanner Wire
• Lens Block/SBU Assembly
• Scanner Drive Motor
• Polygon Mirror Motor
• Paper Side Fence
• Memory All Clear
2) For more details about accessing SP modes, refer to section 4.
6.8.1 PRINTING
NOTE: 1) Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you
start these adjustments.
2) Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3, No.10) to print the test
pattern for the following procedures.
3) Set SP 2-902-3 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

1. Check the leading edge registration for each paper feed station, and adjust
them using SP1-001.
2. Check the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust them
using SP1-002.
_
Tray SP mode Specification
Any paper tray SP1-001-1 ^
By-pass feed SP1-001-2 3 ± 2 mm
Duplex SP1-001-3
1st paper feed SP1-002-1
2nd paper feed SP1-002-2
3rd paper feed (Optional
SP1-002-3 2 ± 1.5 mm
PFU tray 1), or LCT
4th paper feed (Optional
SP1-002-4 B027R508.WMF
PFU tray 2)
By-pass feed SP1-002-5
Duplex, side 2 SP1-002-6
A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
6-36
10 August, 2001 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
Blank Margin
NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within the
specifications, adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and right side edge blank margins, and adjust them
using the following SP modes.
SP mode Specification a
Trailing edge SP2-101-
3 ± 2 mm
2/3/4 `
Right edge SP2-101-6 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm
Leading edge SP2-101-1 3 ± 2 mm
Left edge SP2-101-5 2 ± 1.5 mm
Trailing edge (duplex SP2-101-7 2 ± 2 mm
copy, 2nd side) ^
Left edge (duplex SP2-101-8 2 ± 1.5 mm
copy, 2nd side) _
Right edge (duplex SP2-101-9 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm B027R509.WMF
copy, 2nd side)
A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin

B: Right Edge Blank Margin
C: Leading Edge Blank Margin
D: Left Edge Blank Margin
Main Scan Magnification

1. Print the single-dot grid pattern (SP2-902, no.5).
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Check the magnification, and adjust the magnification using SP2-909 if
necessary. The specification is ± 1%.
6-37
Parallelogram Image Adjustment

Do the following procedure if a parallelogram is printed while adjusting the printing
registration or the printing margin using a trimming area pattern.
NOTE: The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side
registration for each paper tray station.
[B]
Turn
clockwise
[C] [D]
Turn
counterclockwise
[A] B027R013.WMF
B027R510.WMF
1. Check whether the trimming area pattern (SP2-902, No.10) is printed as a

parallelogram, as shown. If it is, do the following.
2. Remove the laser unit [A] (☛ 6.2).
3. Remove the bracket [B] (2 screws).
4. Install the adjusting cam [C] (P/N: A2309003).
5. Secure the adjustment bracket [D] (P/N A2679002) using the screw which was
used for bracket [B]. However, do not tighten the screws at this time.
6. Adjusts the laser unit position by turning the adjusting cam. (Refer to the above
illustration for the relationship between the image and the cam rotation
direction).
7. Tighten the adjustment bracket.
8. Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If it is still unsatisfactory,
repeat steps 4 to 8.
6-38
6.8.2 SCANNING
NOTE: 1) Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the
printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin
adjustment.
2) Use an S5S test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them using the
following SP modes if necessary.
^
SP mode
Leading Edge SP4-010
Side-to-side SP4-011
A: Leading Edge Registration _

B027R511.WMF
Magnification
NOTE: Use an S5S test chart to perform the following adjustment.
Replacement
Adjustment
B
A: Sub Scan Magnification B027R500.WMF

B: Main Scan magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio, and adjust it using the following SP mode if
necessary. The specification is ±1%.
SP mode
Sub Scan Magnification SP4-009
Main Scan Magnification SP4-008
6-39
Standard White Density Adjustment
This adjusts the standard white density level.

Perform this adjustment in any of the following conditions:
• After replacing the standard white plate.
• After replacing the NVRAM on the controller board. (If only controller board is
replaced, this adjustment is not necessary, as the NVRAM from the old controller
board is put on the new controller board.)
• After performing a memory all clear (SP5-801).
Procedure:
1. Place 10 sheets of new A4 sideways (do not use any recycled paper) or A3
paper on the exposure glass and close the platen cover or the ADF.
2. Enter SP 4-428 and select “1: Yes”. The standard white density is automatically
adjusted.
6-40
6.8.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Registration
_
B027R514.WMF
A: Leading Edge Registration
A267R513.WMF
NOTE: Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP mode
Side-to-side Registration SP6-006-1
Leading Edge Registration (Simplex) SP6-006-2
Trailing Edge Blank Margin SP6-006-3
Side-to-side Registration (Duplex: rear) SP6-006-4
Sub Scan Magnification
Replacement
Adjustment
NOTE: Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the magnification, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
The specification is ±1%.
SP mode
Sub scan magnification SP6-006-5
6-41
6.8.4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

After clearing the memory, or if the touch panel detection function is not working
correctly, follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen.
NOTE: Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These
items are for design use only.
1. Press ", press #$$%, and then press & 5 times to open the Self-
Diagnostics menu.
B027R533.WMF
B027R554.WMF
2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press #).
3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker (+) appears
exactly where the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and
repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press ').
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
calibration settings.
6-42
10 August, 2001 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
!CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
7.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

7.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
To prevent damage to the machine, the main Enter SP mode, and then turn
machine cannot be operated until the SC has the main power switch off and
A
been reset by a service representative (see the on.
note below).
SCs that disable only the features that use the Turn the operation switch or
defective item. Although these SCs are not shown main switch off and on.
B to the user under normal conditions, they are
displayed on the operation panel only when the
defective feature is selected.
The SC history is updated. The machine can be The SC will not be displayed.
C
operated as usual. Only the SC history is updated.
Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs Turn the operation switch off
D displayed on the operation panel. These are re- and on.
displayed if the error occurs again.
NOTE: 1) If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then
shooting
Trouble-
reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.

2) If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load
before replacing motors or sensors.
7-1
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 10 August, 2001
7.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
101 B Exposure lamp error • Exposure lamp defective
The standard white level was not • Lamp stabilizer defective
detected properly when scanning the • Exposure lamp connector defective
white plate. • Standard white plate dirty
• Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of
position or dirty
• SBU defective
120 D Scanner home position error 1 • Scanner drive motor defective
The scanner home position sensor • Scanner motor defective
does not detect the on condition during • Harness between SBCU and
initialization or copying. scanner drive motor disconnected
• Harness between SBCU and
scanner drive motor power source
disconnected
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness between SBCU and HP
sensor disconnected
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
121 D Scanner home position error 2 • SIB or scanner drive motor defective
The scanner home position sensor • Scanner motor defective
does not detect the off condition during • Harness between SBCU and
initialization. scanner drive motor disconnected
• Harness between SBCU and
scanner drive motor power source
disconnected
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness between SBCU and HP
sensor disconnected
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
144 B SBU connection error Cable between SBU and IPU board
The IPU does not detect the SBU disconnected.
connection signal.
192 B Automatic SBU adjustment error • SBU defective
An error is detected during automatic • SBCU board defective
SBU adjustment (SP4-428) • Exposure lamp stabilizer defective
• Exposure lamp defective
• Dirty white plate
193 B Image transfer error • IPU board defective
The IPU board does not finish within 1 • Controller board defective
minute after the image data has been • Video controller defective
transferred to the controller board.
195 B DFGATE assert error • ADF interface cable defective
The DFGATE signal does not assert • SBCU board defective
within 30 seconds after the original has • Mismatched firmware between the
been scanned. SBCU board and ADF
196 B DFGATE negate error • ADF interface cable defective
The DFGATE signal does not negate • SBCU board defective
within 1 minute after the DFGATE has • Mismatched firmware between the
been asserted. SBCU board and ADF
7-2

197 B DFGATE error • ADF interface cable defective
The DFGEATE signal has already been • SBCU board defective
asserted at the original scan. • Mismatched firmware between the
SBCU board and ADF
198 B Memory address error • Mismatched firmware between the
The IPU board does not receive the SBCU board and controller board
memory address from the controller • Controller defective
board. • SBCU defective
• IPU board defective
199 B DF scanning finish error • ADF interface cable defective
The original does not finish scanning • SBCU board defective
with in 1 minute • Mismatched firmware between the
SBCU board and ADF
302 B Charge roller current leak • Charge roller damaged
A charge roller current leak signal is • Charge high voltage supply board
detected. defective
• Poor connection of the PCU
320 B Polygon motor error • Polygon mirror motor defective
The polygon motor does not reach its • Poor connection between the
operating speed within 10 seconds after polygon mirror motor driver and the
the polygon motor on signal, or the lock SBCU board
signal is not detected for more than 200 • SBCU board defective
ms continuously during operation.
322 B Laser synchronization error • Poor connection between the laser
The main scan synchronization detector synchronization detector board and
board cannot detect the laser the SBCU board
synchronization signal for more than 10 • Laser synchronization detector board
consecutive 50 ms intervals. out of position
• Laser synchronization detector board
defective
• SBCU board defective
• LD unit defective
323 B LD drive current over • LD unit defective (not enough power,
The LD drive board applies more than due to aging)
100 mA to the LD. • Poor connection between the LD unit
and the SBCU board
390 D TD sensor error • TD sensor abnormal
shooting
Trouble-
The TD sensor outputs less than 0.5V • Poor connection of the PCU
or more than 4.0V 10 times
consecutively during copying.
391 B Development bias leak • Poor connection of the PCU
A development bias leak signal is • High voltage supply board defective
detected.
392 B TD sensor initial setting error • Someone forgot to remove the toner
TD sensor output voltage falls out of the seal of the PCU
adjustment range (2.0 ±<> 0.2 V) after • ID sensor defective
the TD sensor initial setting has been • TD sensor abnormal
finished. • Drum does not turn
• Development roller does not turn
• Poor connection of the PCU
7-3

401 B Transfer roller leak error 1 • High voltage supply board defective
402 B Transfer roller leak error 2 • Poor connection of the PCU
A transfer roller current leak signal is • Transfer/separation unit set
detected. incorrectly
The current feedback signal for the • Transfer roller damaged
transfer roller is not detected.
411 B Separation bias leak error • High voltage supply board defective
A separation bias leak signal is • Poor connection of the PCU
detected. • Discharge plate defective
490 B Toner supply motor leak error Toner supply motor defective
Over 1 A supplied to the toner supply
motor for longer than 200 ms.
500 B Main motor lock • Too much load on the drive
A main motor lock signal is not detected mechanism
for more than 500 ms after the main • Main motor defective
motor starts to rotate, or the lock signal
is not detected for more than 500 ms
during rotation after the last signal.
501 B 1st paper tray lift motor malfunction • Paper lift sensor defective
502 B 2nd paper tray lift motor malfunction • Tray lift motor defective
503 B 3rd paper tray lift motor malfunction • Too much load on the drive
(optional paper tray unit) mechanism
504 B 4th paper tray lift motor malfunction • Poor tray lift motor connection
(optional paper tray unit)
The paper lift sensor is not activated
after the tray lift motor has been on for
18 seconds.
506 B Paper tray motor lock (optional paper • Paper tray unit motor defective
tray unit) • Too much load on the drive
A motor lock signal is not detected for mechanism
more than 1.5 s or the lock signal is not
detected for more than 1.0 s during
rotation.
508 B Rear fence drive error (optional LCT) • Rear fence motor defective
The return position sensor is not • Return position sensor defective
activated after the rear fence drive • Too much load on the drive
motor has been on to lower the tandem mechanism
tray for 8 seconds.
509 B Side fence drive error (optional LCT) • Side fence motor defective
The side fence positioning sensor is not • Side fence position sensor defective
activated for more 3 seconds when the • Side fence close sensor defective
paper stack in the left tray is moved to • Too much load on the drive
the right tray. mechanism
The side fence close sensor is not
activated for more 3 seconds after
moving the paper stack to the right tray.
510 B LCT lower limit error • Tray lift motor defective
The lower limit sensor does not activate • Poor connection of the tray lift motor
within 8 seconds after the tray has been • Lower limit sensor defective
lowered. • Too much load on the drive
mechanism
7-4

520 B Paper tray error • A defective motor
An error occurs (i.e motor error, or • A defective sensor
sensor error, etc) for any paper tray. • Too much load on the drive
mechanism
541 A Fusing thermistor open • Fusing thermistor defective or out of
The fusing temperature detected by the position
thermistor was below 0 °C for 5 • Fusing lamp open
seconds. • Fusing thermostat open
The fusing temperature does not rise • Power supply board defective
+15 °C (center) or +12 °C (at the ends) • Poor connection of the fusing unit
five times within 2 minutes after the
fusing lamps have been turned on.
542 A Fusing temperature warm-up error • Fusing thermistor defective or out of
The fusing temperature does not reach position
the standby temperature within 20 • Fusing lamp open
seconds after the main switch is turned • Fusing thermostat open
on. • Power supply board defective
• Poor connection of the fusing unit
543 A Fusing overheat error 1 • Fusing thermistor defective
A fusing temperature of over 231°C is • Power supply board defective
detected for 5 second by the fusing • SBCU board defective
thermistor.
544 A Fusing overheat error 2 • Fusing thermistor defective
A fusing temperature of over 251°C is • Power supply board defective
detected by the fusing temperature • SBCU board defective
monitor circuit in the SBCU board.
546 A Unstable fusing temperature • Thermistor defective
The fusing temperature varies 50°C or • Poor connection of the fusing unit
more within 1 second twice • Power supply unit defective
continuously.
547 B Zero cross signal malfunction • Power supply board defective
Zero cross signals are not detected • SBCU board defective
within a certain period.
548 A Fusing unit set error • Poor connection of the fusing unit
The machine does not detect the fusing • The fusing unit is not installed
unit.
590 B Exhaust fan motor error • Poor connection of the exhaust fan
The CPU detects an exhaust fan lock motor
shooting
Trouble-
signal for more than 5 seconds. • Too much load on the motor drive
611 B Communication break error between • Serial line connecting SBCU and
SBCU and ADF ADF unstable
The SBCU receives a break signal from • External noise
the ADF main board. • ADF main board defective
612 B Communication command error • SBCU board defective
between SBCU and ADF • Download SBCU firmware again
The SBCU sends a command to the
ADF main board that it cannot execute.
7-5

620 B Communication timeout error between • Serial line connecting SBCU and
SBCU and finisher finisher unstable
The SBCU cannot receive a response • External noise
within 100 ms after 3 attempts after • SBCU board and finisher main board
sending data to the finisher. connection defective or loose
• Finisher main board defective
SBCU and finisher finisher unstable
A break (low) signal was received from • External noise
the finisher.
630 C Communication failure with CSS (RSS) • Occurred with an SC call, CC call,
The communication from the copier supply management call, user call, or
was detected as abnormal at the CSS CE call.
center. This error occurs when the • Timeout while no response from the
acknowledge signal from the LADP LADP, and abnormal signal on the
does not complete normally. RS-485 line between PI and LADP.
640 C SBCU control data transfer checksum • Controller board defective
error • External noise
A sampling of control data sent from the • SBCU board defective
SBCU to the controller reveals a
checksum error. Only the logging count
is performed.
641 C SBCU control data transfer abnormal • Controller board defective
A sampling of the control data sent from • External noise
the SBCU reveals an abnormality. • SBCU board defective
SBCU and duplex unit duplex unit unstable
The SBCU cannot receive a response • External noise
within 1 second from the duplex unit. • SBCU board and duplex main board
connection defective or loose
• Duplex main board defective
670 D Engine response error • SBCU installed incorrectly
After powering on the machine, a • SBCU defective
response is not received from the • Controller board defective
engine within 30 seconds.
672 D Controller-to-operation panel • Controller stall
communication error at startup • Controller board installed incorrectly
After powering on the machine, the • Controller board defective
communication circuit between the • Operation panel connector loose or
controller and the operation panel is not defective
opened, or communication with
controller is interrupted after a normal
startup.
720 B Finisher jogger motor error (500-sheet • Jogger H.P sensor defective
finisher) • Jogger motor defective
The finisher jogger H.P sensor remains
de-activated for a certain time when
returning to home position.
activated for a certain time when
moving away from home position.
7-6

722 B Finisher jogger motor error (1000-sheet • Jogger H.P sensor defective
finisher) • Jogger motor defective
de-activated for a certain time when
returning to home position.
activated for a certain time when
moving away from home position.
724 B Finisher staple hammer motor error • Staple jam
(1000-sheet finisher) • Stapler overload caused by trying to
Stapling does not finish within 600 ms staple too many sheets
after the staple hammer motor turned • Staple hammer motor defective
on.
725 B Finisher stack feed-out motor error • Stack feed-out H.P sensor defective
(1000-sheet finisher) • Stack feed-out motor defective
The stack feed-out belt H.P sensor
does not activate within a certain time
after the stack feed-out motor turned
on.
726 B Finisher lift motor error (1000-sheet • Shift tray lift motor defective
finisher) • Stack height sensor defective
The stack height sensor does not
activate within a certain time after the
shift tray lift motor turned on.
727 B Finisher staple hammer motor error • Staple jam
(500-sheet finisher) • Stapler overload caused by trying to
Stapling does not finish within a certain staple too many sheets
time after staple hammer motor turned • Staple hammer motor defective
on.
728 B Finisher paper stack height error (500- • Stack height lever solenoid defective
sheet finisher) • Stack height sensor defective
The stack height detection lever does • Lever sensor defective
not return to its home position before • Main control board defective
going to detect the stack height.
730 B Finisher stapler motor error (1000-sheet • Stapler motor defective
finisher) • Stapler H.P sensor defective
The stapler does not return to its home • Poor stapler motor connection
position within a certain time after the
stapler motor turned on.
shooting
Trouble-
The stapler H.P sensor does not

activate within a certain time after the
stapler motor turned on.
731 B Output tray motor error (500-sheet 500-sheet finisher
finisher) • Output tray motor defective
Exit guide plate motor error (1000-sheet • Tray upper limit sensor defective
finisher)
The tray upper limit sensor does not 1000-sheet finisher
activate within a certain time after the • Exit guide plate motor defective
shift motor turned on. (500-sheet • Exit guide plate HP sensor defective
finisher)
• Exit guide plate open sensor
The exit guide plate open sensor or exit defective
guide plate HP sensor does not activate
within a certain time after the exit guide
plate motor turned on. (1000-sheet
finisher)
7-7

732 B Finisher shift motor error (1000-sheet • Shift motor defective
finisher) • Shift tray HP sensor defective
Roller shift does not finish within a
certain time after the shift motor turned
on.
791 B Bridge communication error • Poor connection between the main
The SBCU cannot communicate with machine and bridge unit
the bridge unit properly when the • SBCU board defective
finisher is installed.
792 B Finisher connection error • Poor connection between the finisher
The SBCU cannot communicate with and bridge unit
the finisher properly when the bridge • SBCU board defective
unit is installed.
793 B Interchange communication error • Poor connection between the
The SBCU cannot communicate with interchange unit and main machine
the interchange unit properly when the • SBCU board defective
duplex unit is installed.
800 D Startup without video output end error Controller board defective
(K)
Video transfer to the engine is started,
but the engine did not issue a video
transmission end command within the
specified time.
804 D Startup without video input end (K) Controller board defective
A video transmission was requested
from the scanner, but the scanner did
not issue a video transmission end
command within the specified time.
818 D Watchdog error • Controller board defective
The CPU does not access the • Software malfunction – download
watchdog register within a certain time. controller firmware again
819 D Kernel mismatch error Download controller firmware again
Software bug
820 D Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU • Controller board defective
The central processing unit returned an • Download controller firmware again
error during the self-diagnostic test.
821 D Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC Controller board defective
The ASIC returned an error during the
self-diagnostic test because the ASIC
and CPU timer interrupts were
compared and determined to be out of
range.
822 D Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD • HDD defective
The hard disk drive returned an error • HDD connector defective
during the self-diagnostic test. • Controller board defective
823 D Self-diagnostic Error: NIB • Network interface board defective
The network interface board returned • Controller board defective
an error during the self-diagnostic test.
824 D Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM • Replace the NVRAM on the
The resident non-volatile RAM returned controller board
an error during the self-diagnostic test. • Replace the controller board
7-8

826 D Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM/Optional Replace the NVRAM on the controller
NVRAM board
The NVRAM or optional NVRAM
returned an error during the self-
diagnostic test.
827 D Self-diagnostic Error: RAM Download controller firmware again
The resident RAM returned a verify
828 D Self-diagnostic Error: ROM • Controller board defective
The resident read-only memory • Download controller firmware again
returned an error during the self-
diagnostic test.
829 D Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM • Replace the optional memory board
The optional RAM returned an error • Controller board defective
during the self-diagnostic test.
835 D Self-Diagnostic Error: Parallel Interface • Loopback connector not detected
Loopback test error. • IEEE1284 connector defective
• Controller board defective
836 D Self-diagnostic Error: Resident Font Replace the controller board
ROM
The resident font ROM returned an
837 D Self-diagnostic Error: Optional Font Replace the controller board
ROM
The optional font ROM returned an
838 D Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator Replace the controller board
A verify error occurred when setting
data was read from the clock generator
via the I2C bus.
850 D Network I/F Abnormal • NIB defective
NIB interface error. • Controller board defective
851 D IEEE 1394 I/F Abnormal • IEEE1384 interface board defective
IEEE1394 interface error. • Controller board defective
860 B Startup without HD connection at main • Cable between HDC and HDD loose
power on or defective
The hard disk connection is not • HDD power connector loose or
shooting
Trouble-
detected. defective
• HDD defective
• Replace the controller board
861 B Startup without HD detection at power • Cable between HDC and HDD loose
key on or defective
The hard disk connection is not • HDD power connector loose or
detected. defective
• HDD defective
Replace the controller board
862 A Maximum number of bad sectors SC863 returned while reading data
detected on HD from the HD and the number of
Up to 101 bad sectors have appeared registered bad sectors reached 101.
in the area on the hard disk where
image data is archived, and the hard
disk may require replacement.
7-9

863 B Startup without HD data lead A bad sector occurred during operation
of the HDD
Data stored on the hard disk is not read
correctly.
864 D HD data CRC error Data transfer was abnormal in the data
During operation of the HD, the HD read from the HDD.
responded with a CRC error.
865 D HD access error Replace the controller board
The hard disk detected an error.
900 D Electronic total counter error Replace the NVRAM on the controller
The value of the total counter has board
already exceeded 9999999
901 D Mechanical total count error Mechanical total counter defective
The SBCU board cannot receive the
mechanical total count data.
951 B F-gate error at write request • Download controller firmware
After the IPU receives an F-gate signal, • SBCU board defective
it receives another F-gate signal.
953 B Scanner setting error Download controller firmware
The IPU does not respond with the
scanner setting signal required to start
scanning processing.
954 B Printer setting error • Replace the IPU board
The IPU does not respond with the • Replace the controller board
settings that are required to start image • Download the controller firmware
processing by the printer.
955 B Memory setting error • Replace the IPU board
The IPU does not respond with the • Replace the controller board
settings that are required to start image • Download the controller firmware
processing using the memory.
964 B Printer ready error • Replace the IPU board
The printer ready signal is not • Replace the controller board
generated within 17 seconds after the • Download the controller firmware
IPU received the print start signal.
984 D Print image data transfer error • Controller board defective
The image transfer from the controller • SBCU board defective
to the engine via the PCI bus does not • Connectors between SBCU and
end within 15 s after starting. controller loose or defective
986 D Software write parameter setting error Download controller firmware again
An unstable area at the storage
destination in the settings table is set at
NULL for the parameter received by the
write module.
7-10

990 D Software performance error • Software defective
The software attempted to perform an • Internal parameter incorrect
unexpected operation. • Insufficient working memory
• When this SC occurs, the file name,
address, and data will be stored in
NVRAM. This information can be
checked by using SP7-403. Note the
above data and the situation in which
this SC occurs. Then report the data
and conditions to your technical
control center.
991 C Software continuity error • No operation required. This SC code
The software attempted to perform an does not appear on the panel, and is
unexpected operation. However, unlike only logged.
SC990, the object of the error is
continuity of the software.
996 B FCU board error • FCU board defective and requires
FCU board is connected but not ready. replacement
• Download FCU firmware
997 B Application function selection error • Download the firmware for the
The application selected by a key press application that failed
on operation panel does not start or • An option required by the application
ends abnormally. (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed
998 D Application start error • Download controller firmware
After power on, the application does not • Replace the controller board
start within 60 s. (All applications • An option required by the application
neither start nor end normally.) (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed
999 D Program download error • Board installed incorrectly

The download (program, print data, • SBCU board defective
language data) from the IC card does • Controller board defective
not execute normally. • IC card defective
• NVRAM defective
• Loss of power during downloading
• Important Notes About SC999
• Primarily intended for operating in
the download mode, logging is not
performed with SC999.
• If the machine loses power while
shooting
Trouble-
downloading, or if for some other

reason the download does not end
normally, this could damage the
controller board or the PCB targeted
for the download and prevent
subsequent downloading. If this
problem occurs, the damaged PCB
must be replaced.
7-11
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 10 August, 2001
7.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

7.2.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON
As soon as the main machine is powered on, the controller waits for the initial
settings of the copy engine to take effect and then starts an independent self-
diagnostic test program. The self-diagnostic test follows the path of the flow chart
shown below and checks the CPU, memory, HDD, and so on. An SC code is
displayed in the touch panel if the self-diagnostic program detects any malfunction
or abnormal condition.
Self-Diagnostic Test Flow
Power On
Initialization
Memory Check for

Self-Diagnostic Test
Self-Diagnostic
Mode Selection
CPU Check
ASIC Check Font ROM Check
Memory Check RTC Check
Program ROM, IC Card

DIMM CRC Check I/FCheck
SSCG Check Network Check
OPC Check Engine I/F Check
Illegal Interrupt
NVRAM Check Check
System OS,
HDD Check Application Check
IEEE1284
I/F Check
B027T516.WMF
7-12
10 August, 2001 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
7.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is
powered on, you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually
in order to test other components or conditions that are not tested during self-
diagnosis after power on. The following device is required in order to put the
machine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode.
No. Name
G02119350 Parallel Loopback Connector
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis

Follow this procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.
1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the
Centronics I/F port.
2. Hold down ", press and hold down #, and then while pressing both keys at
the same time, switch on the machine.
You will see “Now Loading” on the touch-panel, and then you will see the
results of the test.
shooting
Trouble-
7-13
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 10 August, 2001
A report like the one below is printed every time a detailed self-diagnostic test
is executed, whether errors were detected or not.
MODEL NAME XXXX

Serial No. : ACLD000034 Firmware P/# : ACP82XXXX [1/1]
Self-Diagnosis Report Firmware Version : 2.49.01 Wed Nov 22 13:15:30 2000
[System Construction]
Kernel Version : NetBSD 1.3.3 (SHINYOKOHAMA_ROM) #0: Sat Nov 11 16:15:35 JST 2000
CPU System Bus Clock : 100.0 MHz CPU Pipeline Clock : 200.0 MHz
Board Type :7 ASIC Version : 1397306160
RTC Existence : existence RAM Capacity : 100.663296 MB
HDD Existence : existence HDD Model :
[Total Counter ]
0001000
[Program No. @]
MAIN : ACP82XXXX ENGINE : Ver1.96
LCDC : V1.39 PI :
ADF : B3515620B SIB : B0045383
FIN : FIN_SDL :
BANK : A6825150 LCT :
MBX : FCU :
DPX :
[Error List @@@]

SCCODE (ERROR CODE ) SC CODE (ERROR CODE) SC CODE (ERROR CODE) SC CODE (ERROR CODE)
SC835 (110C) SC820 (0001) SC820 (0002) SC820 (0003)

SC820 (0004) SC820 (0005)
B027T515.WMF
7-14
10 August, 2001 PAPER FEED TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3 PAPER FEED TROUBLESHOOTING

When a paper double feed or paper non feed problem occurs, fix the problem in
accordance with the following flow chart.
Paper Feed Problem
Non Feed Double Feed
Yes
Small Paper Size?
(A5/HLT)
No
Reduce the bottom plate Reduce the bottom plate

pressure for normal paper size. pressure for small paper size.
*Note:
Change the value of the Change the value of the
following SP mode to a larger following SP mode to a larger If the feed problem
number. number. always occurs at a
certain point before
SP No. Tray SP No. Tray near-end, change the
1-908-1 1st Tray 1-908-2 1st Tray remaining paper
1-909-1 2nd Tray 1-909-2 2nd Tray threshold with
1-910-1 3rd Tray 1-910-2 3rd Tray SP 1-908-6, 1-909-6,
1-910-6, and/or
1-911-1 4th Tray 1-911-2 4th Tray 1-911-6
Yes Feed problem Yes

Small Paper Size? occurs at paper
(A5/HLT) near-end? *Note
No No
shooting
Trouble-
Apply the bottom plate pressure Apply the bottom plate pressure Apply the bottom plate pressure
for normal paper size. for small paper size. at near-end condition for small
paper size.
Change the value of the Change the value of the Change the value of the
following SP mode to a smaller following SP mode to a smaller following SP mode to a larger
number. number. number.
SP No. Tray SP No. Tray SP No. Tray
1-908-1 1st Tray 1-908-2 1st Tray 1-908-4 1st Tray
1-909-1 2nd Tray 1-909-2 2nd Tray 1-909-4 2nd Tray
1-910-1 3rd Tray 1-910-2 3rd Tray 1-910-4 3rd Tray
1-911-1 4th Tray 1-911-2 4th Tray 1-911-4 4th Tray
B027T500.WMF
7-15
SKEWED IMAGE 10 August, 2001
7.4 SKEWED IMAGE

Do the following to fix a skewed image problem.
Print out the Trimming Pattern (SP2-

902, no.10) from every paper tray.
No Make a copy using the

Is the copy skewed?
ADF
Yes
Do the following. No
Is the copy skewed? OK
- Check the side fence position of the
paper tray.
- Clean or replace the paper feed Yes
roller.
- Clean the registration roller.
- Change the value of SP1-903 to a Do the following.
larger number.
- Check the side fence position of the
original table.
- Clean or replace the original feed
belt, pick-up roller, and separation
roller.
- Clean the transport roller and exit
roller.
- Secure the ADF using the long hole,
then adjust the ADF position.
B027T501.WMF
7-16
10 August, 2001 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
7.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

7.5.1 SENSORS
Component
CN Condition Symptom
(Symbol)
Open SC120 is displayed.
337-2
Scanner H.P The CPU does not detect the scanner home
(SBCU) Shorted
position and the scanner motor does not stop.
337-5 Open APS and ARE do not function correctly.
Platen Cover
(SBCU) Shorted No symptom
Open The CPU cannot detect the original size
335-3, -4
Original Width properly. APS and ARE do not function
(SBCU) Shorted correctly.
335-8, -9
Original Length-1 properly. APS and ARE do not function
336-3, -4
Original Length-2 properly. APS and ARE do not function
327-3 Open SC390 is displayed
Toner Density
(SBCU) Shorted
The Paper End indicator lights even if paper
Open
306-2 is placed in the 1st paper tray.
1st Paper End
(SBCU) The Paper End indicator does not light even if
Shorted
there is no paper in the 1st paper tray.
The Paper End indicator lights even if paper
Open
307-A2 is placed in the 2nd paper tray.
2nd Paper End
(SBCU) The Paper End indicator does not light even if
Shorted
there is no paper in the 2nd paper tray.
321-3 Open SC392 is displayed (see note)
Image Density
(SBCU) Shorted
The paper overflow message is not displayed
324-5 Open
Paper Over Flow when the paper overfull condition exist.
(SBCU)
Shorted The paper overflow message is displayed.
The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a
Open
324-2 copy is made.
Paper Exit
(SBCU) The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is
Shorted
no paper.
shooting
Trouble-

Open
306-5 copy is made.
Upper Relay
Shorted
no paper.
Open
307-A5 copy is made.
Lower Relay
Shorted
no paper.
Open
321-6 copy is made.
Registration
Shorted
no paper.
305-7 Open SC501 will be displayed.
1st Paper Lift
(SBCU) Shorted Paper jam will occur during copying.
7-17
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 10 August, 2001
Component
(Symbol)
305-10 Open SC502 will be displayed.
2nd Paper Lift
(SBCU) Shorted Paper jam will occur during copying.
1st Paper Height 307-B2 Open The CPU cannot determine the paper near-
–1 (SBCU) Shorted end condition properly.
1st Paper Height 307-B5 Open The CPU cannot determine the paper near-
2nd Paper Height 307-B9 Open The CPU cannot determine the paper near-
2nd Paper Height 307-B12 Open The CPU cannot determine the paper near-
NOTE: An SC condition occurs only when a new PCU is being installed in the
machine. During copying, if the ID sensor fails, the image density will be
changed.
7-18
10 August, 2001 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
7.5.2 SWITCHES
Component
(Symbol)
281-1,2 Open The machine does not turn on.
Main
(PSU) Shorted The machine does not turn off.
The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if the
Open
Right Upper 324-8 right upper cover is opened.
Cover (SBCU) The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the
Shorted
right upper cover is closed.
Open
308-9 right cover is opened.
Right Cover
(SBCU) The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the
Shorted
right cover is closed.
Open
Right Lower 307-A8 right lower cover is opened.
Cover (SBCU) The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the
Shorted
right lower cover is closed.
Open The CPU cannot detect the proper paper
Upper Paper 308-1,2,4,5
size, and misfeeds may occur when a copy is
Size (SBCU) Shorted made.
Open The CPU cannot detect the proper paper
Lower Paper 308-6,7,9,10
size, and misfeeds may occur when a copy is
Size (SBCU) Shorted made.
The TD sensor initial setting procedure is not
Open
327-7 performed when a new PCU is installed.
New PCU Detect
(SBCU) The TD sensor initial setting procedure is
Shorted
performed whenever the front cover is closed.
Open
Front Cover 311-2, 4 front cover is opened.
Safety (SBCU) The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the
Shorted
front cover is closed.
The LCD does not off even if the operation
Open
105-1 switch is turned off.
Operation
(IPU The LCD does not on even if the operation
Shorted
switch is turned on.
shooting
Trouble-
7-19
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS 10 August, 2001
7.6 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Rating Symptom when turning on the main
Fuse
115 V 220 ~ 240 V switch
Power Supply Board
FU1 15 A/250 V ---- No response.
FU2 8 A/125 V 5 A/250 V No response
Anti-condensation/Tray Heater does not
FU3 2 A/125 V 1 A/250V
turn on.
Optional finisher, bridge unit, and shift
FU4 6.3 A/125 V 6.3 A/250V tray does not work then SC792 is
displayed.
Covers Open indicator is lit then SC901
FU5 6.3 A/125 V 6.3 /250 V
is displayed
FU6 6.3 A/125 V 6.3 A/250V The touch panel does not turn on.
FU7 4 A/125 V 4 A/250 V SC990 is displayed
7-20
9 November, 2001 RSS SET UP
APPENDIX 1 (FOR MODEL R-C2)

1. RSS (REMOTE SERVICE SYSTEM)
1.1 RSS SET UP
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A] B027R705.WMF
B027R515.WMF
[F]
[H]
[G]
[E] B027I900.WMF
B027I305.WMF
!CAUTION
1. Remove the connector cover [A] (1 clip) and disconnect the cable.
2. Remove the rear cover [B] (4 screws).
3. Remove the duplex connector cover [C] (1 screw) and the lower rear cover [D]
(2 screws).
4. Install the RSS board [E] (2 screws).
5. Install the harness [F] between the RSS board and the SBCU board (CN512).
When connecting only one machine to the line adapter, skip step 6.
6. Set the jumper switch [G] on the RSS board as shown (default setting: 1-2).
7. Remove the cover [H] from the lower rear cover.
APPENDIX-1
RSS SET UP 9 November, 2001
[A]
B027I901.WMF
Line Adapter
B027I902.WMF
Machine No. 1 2 3 4 5
Jumper Set 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 1-2
PI device code 0 1 2 3 4
8. Reassemble the machine.

9. Connect the modular cord [A] to the line adapter as shown.
10. Install the line adapter (refer to chapter 2-1 L-ADP Installation Procedure in the
CSS Service Manual).
11. Turn on the machine.
When connecting only one machine to the line adapter, skip step 12.
12. Enter the Copier SP mode and set the PI device code with SP5-821 (default 0).
NOTE: After changing the value, turn the main power switch off and on to
enable the PI device code.
APPENDIX-2
9 November, 2001 SP MODE SETTINGS
1.2 SP MODE SETTINGS

After installing the machine and line adapter, change the value of SP5-816 (CSS
Function) to 1.
Check the values of the following SP modes. Ensure they are set correctly.
NOTE: SP5-507 is only for the Japanese version. Do not change.
• SP5-501-1 (PM Alarm Interval): 120k
• SP5-504 (Jam Alarm Setting): 3
• SP5-505 (Error Alarm Setting): 50
• SP5-508-1 (CC Call – Remain of Jam): 1 (On)
• SP5-508-2 (CC Call – Continuous Jam Occurrence): 1 (On)
• SP5-508-3 (CC Call - Cover Open): 1 (On)
• SP5-508-4 (New CC Call Mode): 1 (New Mode)
1.3 CHECKING ITEMS USING RSS

1.3.1 READ ONLY ITEMS
Item
Paper end
Toner end
Staple end
Toner near end
Door open
Paper jam information
Machine condition
Paper size information
System configuration
Vsg, Vsp, Vsdp, Vt data
Fax information (Total No. of Tx, Total No. of Rx, Quick dial, Speed dial, etc)
Printer information (Total No. of print by Emulation, Bit switches, etc)
SP7-001~-003, -101, -204~-206, -301~-305, -320~-328, -401, -403, -502~-507, -801, -803
APPENDIX-3
CHECKING ITEMS USING RSS 9 November, 2001
1.3.2 AUTO CALL AND READ ITEMS

SC Calls
The SC calls are generated according to the SC level as follows. Please note that
the SC levels of this copier are defined differently from other copiers.
SC Level Definition SC Auto Call Condition

Fusing unit SCs which cannot be reset An SC call is generated
A
by customer. immediately
SCs that disable only the features which An SC call is generated when the
B use the defective item. SC occurs two times within 10
copies.
SCs that are not shown on the An SC call is not generated.
C
operation panel.
SCs caused by incorrect sensor An SC call is generated when the
D detection; these can be reset by turning SC occurs two times within 10
the main power switch off and on. copies.
CC Manual Calls
The CC manual call may be generated by the customer, when “1: New Mode” is
selected with SP5-508-4 (the default is “1”). There are two types of CC manual
calls as follows.
CC Code Definition
When the number of jams specified by SP5-508-12 are detected
consecutively:
a). When “0:Auto Call” is selected with SP5-508-22, CC101 will be
generated automatically.
Manual Call: b). When “1: Manual Call” is selected with SP5-508-22, the Manual call key
CC 101 appears on the LCD. Upon pressing the key, a “Manual Call: CC101” is
generated immediately. “Manual Call:CC101” will be listed as an MC in
the Call List screen of the Concorde system, and “Manual Call:CC101”
will be indicated in the “Symptom” column of the call detail screen.
The default setting of SP5-508-22 is “1: Manual Call”.
When in a paper jam or an original jam condition and a cover is open for
longer than the time specified by SP5-508-13, one of the following will occur
after all doors are closed.
a). When “0: Auto Call” is selected with SP5-508-23, CC202 will be
generated automatically.
Manual Call:
b). When “1: Manual Call” is selected with SP5-508-23, the Manual call key
CC 202
appears on the LCD. Upon pressing the key, a “Manual Call: CC202” is
generated immediately. “Manual Call:CC202” will be listed as an MC in
the Call List screen of the Concorde system, and “Manual Call:CC202”
will be indicated in the “Symptom” column of the call detail screen.
The default setting of SP5-508-23 is “1: Manual Call”.
APPENDIX-4
9 November, 2001 CHECKING ITEMS USING RSS
CC Auto Call
The CC auto call will be automatically generated when “0: Previous Mode” is
selected with SP5-508-4 (default is “1”). There are three types of CC auto calls as
follows.
CC Code Definition
When a paper jam is detected five times consecutively, CC101 is
CC 101
automatically generated.
When a paper jam condition is not reset for 15 minutes, CC201 is
CC 201
automatically generated.
When a cover is left open for 15 minutes, CC202 is automatically
CC 202
generated.
Alarm Calls
There are four types of Alarm Calls as follows:
Type Definition
When the PM counter reaches 120,000, a PM Alarm Call is automatically
PM
reported to the Concorde system.
An alarm call is generated after the specified total number of originals goes
Original Count
through the ARDF.
When the SC alarm counter reaches 5, an SC Alarm Call is automatically
SC generated. The SC alarm counter counts the number of SCs and it
decreases when an SC does not occur for a specified number of copies.
When Jam alarm counter reaches 10, a Jam Alarm Call is automatically
generated. The Jam Alarm counter counts the number of paper jams and it
Jam
decreases when a paper jam does not occur for a specified number of
copies.
1.3.3 READ AND WRITE ITEMS

All data for SP modes and UP modes, except for a few modes.
1.3.4 EXECUTE ITEMS

Item Item
Memory all clear Counter reset (all except total counter)
SC reset Original counter reset
PM counter reset Copy counter reset
SC/Jam counter reset Reset counters by each paper tray
APPENDIX-5
JAM HISTORY 9 November, 2001
1.4 JAM HISTORY

The jam history is read as shown below.
The last 5 digits of the total counter

value when the jam occurred
Paper Size
Jam Condition
B027I903.WMF
1.4.1 JAM CONDITION TABLE

Copier
Code Meaning
01 Jams at power on.
03 Paper does not reach the upper relay sensor (from paper tray unit)
04 Paper does not reach the lower relay sensor.
05 Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor (optional paper tray unit).
06 Paper does not reach the LCT relay sensor.
11 Paper does not reach the registration sensor.
12 Paper does not reach the paper exit sensor
13 Paper does not reach the bridge relay sensor
14 Paper does not reach the bridge exit sensor
15 Paper does not reach the duplex entrance sensor.
16 Paper does not reach the duplex exit sensor
17 Paper does not reach the 1-bin tray exit sensor.
20 Paper does not reach the finisher entrance sensor
21 Paper does not reach the finisher shift tray exit sensor.
23 Paper does not reach the finisher staple tray paper sensor.
24 The finisher stack feed out belt H.P sensor does not turn on.
26 Finisher paper taking out error
27 Finisher drive error
28 Finisher tray lift error
29 Finisher jogger drive error
30 Finisher tray shift drive error
31 Finisher staple error
32 Finisher stack feed-out error
33 Finisher feed out error
34 Finisher no response
61 Paper caught at the registration sensor.
62 Paper caught at the paper exit sensor.
63 Paper caught at the bridge relay sensor.
64 Paper caught at the bridge exit sensor.
65 Paper caught at the duplex entrance sensor.
66 Paper caught at the duplex exit sensor.
67 Paper caught at the 1-bin tray exit sensor.
APPENDIX-6
9 November, 2001 OTHERS
Document Feeder
Code Meaning
01 Jam at power on.
05 Original does not reach the registration sensor.
06 Original does not reach the original exit sensor.
07 Original does not reach the original reverse sensor.
55 Original caught at the registration sensor.
56 Original caught at the original exit sensor.
57 Original caught at the original reverse sensor.
1.4.2 PAPER SIZE

Code Paper Size Code Paper Size
05 A4 sideways 86 A5 lengthwise
06 A5 sideways 87 A6 lengthwise
07 A6 sideways 8D B4
0E B5 sideways 8E B5 lengthwise
0F B6 sideways 8F B6 lengthwise
11 Prepaid reply post card sideways 91 Prepaid reply post card lengthwise
12 Post card sideways 92 Post card lengthwise
24 8.5" x 14" sideways A0 11" x 17"
26 8.5" x 11" sideways A4 8.5" x 14" lengthwise
2C 8.5" x 5.5" sideways A6 8.5" x 11" lengthwise
84 A3 AC 8.5" x 5.5" lengthwise
85 A4 lengthwise
1.5 OTHERS
1.5.1 SC630 [RDS COMMUNICATION ERROR]
Frequent occurrence of SC630 indicates a problem in the customer’s
communication line or line adapter. To maintain the communications environment
in good working order, it is necessary to make planned inspections periodically.
1.5.2 PM PROCEDURE OR OTHER MAINTENANCE

Before beginning PM or other maintenance procedures, SP5-816-2 should be set
to "0". This will disable the RSS function. When maintenance is completed, SP5-
816-2 should be set to "1". This will re-enable the RSS function.
NOTE: The RSS function will remain disabled for four hours. Therefore, if
maintenance for longer than four hours is required, SP5-816-2 should be
set to "0" again to disable RSS.
APPENDIX-7

S Af1022 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

S Af1022 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

S Af1022 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model R-C2a/b

(Machine Code: B022/B027)

August 10th, 2001

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

!WARNING FOR LASER UNIT

1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ......................................... 1-1

2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 2-1

3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 3-1

4 SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 4-1

5 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................... 5-1

6 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 6-1

7 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 7-1

PAPER TRAY UNIT (A860/B390)

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .................................................. B390-6

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT................................. B390-14

2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ................................. B391-5

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT................................. B391-11

AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B386)

2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ................................. B386-6

3 SERVICE TABLES............................................................... B386-18

4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT................................. B386-19

INTERCHANGE UNIT (B300/B416)

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION .................................................... B416-4

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT................................... B416-5

2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ................................. B413-4

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT................................... B413-5

SHIFT TRAY UNIT (B313/B459)

2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ................................. B459-3

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT................................... B459-6

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .................................................. B415-3

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT................................... B415-5

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .................................................. B414-6

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT................................... B414-9

BRIDGE UNIT (A897/B417)

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION .................................................... B417-6

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT................................... B417-7

2 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................... B408-8

3 SERVICE TABLES................................................................. B408-9

4 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ................................................ B408-10

5 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ................................. B408-26

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ................................................ B442-10

3 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ................................. B442-21

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

A4/A3 Version LT/DLT Version

Zoom: 25% to 400% in 1% steps (Platen mode)

Mainframe Only Full System

Noise Emission (Sound Power Level):

NOTE: Measurement Conditions

Paper Tray Capacity: Paper Tray:

1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

1.2.2 INSTALLABLE OPTION TABLE

1.3 PAPER PATH

1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. 2nd scanner 15. Development roller

1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS